1. 巴拉基格篇解释(一)巴利 1. Pārājikakaṇḍo
全篇 429 段
1. 第一巴拉基格巴利
1. Paṭhamapārājikaṃ
《苏丁那诵分》的注释巴利
Sudinnabhāṇavāravaṇṇanā
24 买卖商品和出借商品,这叫“商品运用”。这样把本金连同利息一起收回的努力,叫“收回”。因为“在某天已经给了”这类话而忘记的人,让他回忆起来等等,这叫“提醒”。所谓四类,是按刹帝利、婆罗门、居士、沙门来分,或者按比丘等来分为四类。“看见他之后,他这样想”:这里的“看见”一词表示原因,因为主语不同,就像“喝了酥油之后有了力气”一样,其他类似的地方也是这样。说“有能力的善男子”,是就他仅具有亲依止的性质而说的,不是因为他是最后有者。正因如此,他因为母亲等恶知识的因缘而犯了过失,生起追悔,于是证悟的障碍就产生了。对于最后有者,他们在过去诸佛出世时已经得到授记,任何人都无法给他们制造障碍。因此,像指鬘长老等人,虽然造了不善业,仍然成就了证悟。所谓“最后心”,就是死心。就像擦掉、洗净刻写在贝壳上的文字,就说“贝壳刻文已洗净”等等。“居住”:因为与“adhi”这个词结合,“在家”是以处格来当业格用,所以说“在家中”。袈裟被染汁染红了,所以说“因为染汁而呈黄色”。又因为是从染汁生起的,所以味道也叫“染汁味”。巴利
24. Vikkāyikabhaṇḍassa vikkiṇanaṃ iṇadānañca bhaṇḍappayojanaṃ nāma. Evaṃ payojitassa mūlassa saha vaḍḍhiyā gahaṇavāyāmo uddhāro nāma. Asukadivase dinnantiādinā pamuṭṭhassa satuppādanādi sāraṇaṃ nāma. Catubbidhāyāti khattiyabrāhmaṇagahapatisamaṇānaṃ vasena, bhikkhuādīnaṃ vā vasena catubbidhāya. Disvānassa etadahosīti hetuatthe ayaṃ disvāna-saddo asamānakattukattā, yathā ghataṃ pivitvā balaṃ hotīti, evamaññatthāpi evarūpesu. Bhabbakulaputtoti upanissayamattasabhāvena vuttaṃ, na pacchimabhavikatāya. Tenevassa mātādiakalyāṇamittasamāyogena katavītikkamanaṃ nissāya uppannavippaṭisārena adhigamantarāyo jāto. Pacchimabhavikānaṃ pubbabuddhuppādesu laddhabyākaraṇānaṃ na sakkā kenaci antarāyaṃ kātuṃ. Teneva aṅgulimālattherādayo akusalaṃ katvāpi adhigamasampannā eva ahesunti. Carimakacittanti cuticittaṃ. Saṅkhaṃ viya likhitaṃ ghaṃsitvā dhovitaṃ saṅkhalikhitanti āha dhotaiccādi. Ajjhāvasatāti adhi-saddayogena agāranti bhummatthe upayogavacananti āha ‘‘agāramajjhe’’ti. Kasāyarasarattāni kāsāyānīti āha ‘‘kasāyarasapītatāyā’’ti. Kasāyato nibbattatāya ca hi rasopi ‘‘kasāyaraso’’ti vuccati.
26 26. 当“jānāti”这个词不是“了知”的意思时,语法学家们认为,在它的用法中,就像“sappino jānāti”“madhuno jānāti”等例子那样,属格是表示工具格的意义,所以说“不因任何苦而体验”。意思是“不因任何苦而体验”,这里“kiñci”也同样省略了表示工具格的属格词尾,正因如此,下文才说“在两种解释中,前词与后词同格词尾的省略应当理解”。然而,当“jānāti”这个词是“忆念”的意思时,语法学家们说,就像“mātu sarati”等例子那样,属格是表示业格(宾格)的意义,所以说“或者,不忆念任何苦”,意思是由于不曾经历任何苦,所以不忆念。“在两种解释中”,指的是依“体验”义和“忆念”义而说的第二、第三种解释。“前词”,指“kiñci”这个词。“后词”,指“dukkhassa”这个词。本来应该说“kassaci dukkhassa”,却说成“kiñci dukkhassa”,这应当理解为同一个属格词尾的省略。对于“maraṇenapi mayaṃ te”这一句,为了说明“te”这个词除了工具格的意义之外,也可以按“伴随”的意义用工具格来表达,于是说了“我们也将与你分离”这个另外的含义。巴利
26. Yadā jānāti-saddo bodhanattho na hoti, tadā tassa payoge sappino jānāti madhuno jānātītiādīsu viya karaṇatthe sāmivacanaṃ saddasatthavidū icchantīti āha ‘‘kiñci dukkhena nānubhosī’’ti. Kenaci dukkhena nānubhosīti attho, kiñcīti etthāpi hi karaṇatthe sāmivacanassa lopo kato, teneva vakkhati ‘‘vikappadvayepi purimapadassa uttarapadena samānavibhattilopo daṭṭhabbo’’ti. Yadā pana jānāti-saddo saraṇattho hoti, tadā mātu saratītiādīsu viya upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ saddasatthavidū vadantīti āha ‘‘atha vā kiñci dukkhaṃ nassaratīti attho’’ti, kassaci dukkhassa ananubhūtatāya nassaratīti attho. Vikappadvayepīti anubhavanasaraṇatthavasena vutte dutiyatatiyavikappadvaye. Purimapadassāti kiñcīti padassa. Uttarapadenāti dukkhassātipadena. Samānāya sāmivacanabhūtāya vibhattiyā ‘‘kassaci dukkhassā’’ti vattabbe ‘‘kiñci dukkhassā’’ti lopoti daṭṭhabbo. Maraṇenapi mayaṃ teti ettha teti padassa sahatthe karaṇavasenapi atthaṃ dassetuṃ tayā viyogaṃ vā pāpuṇissāmāti atthantaraṃ vuttaṃ.
28 乾闼婆就是唱歌的人。舞者就是舞台上的表演者。戏剧演员就是翻跟头之类的人。因为用各种让人舒服的东西来伺候自己,所以就叫作嬉戏、玩耍,因此在第二种释义里说了“嬉戏”等话。关于“布施、特施等”:这里,经常性的布施叫“布施”,特别的布施叫“特施”,用“等”字把戒等也包括进来。巴利
28.Gandhabbā nāma gāyanakā. Naṭā nāma raṅganaṭā. Nāṭakā laṅghanakādayo. Sukhūpakaraṇehi attano paricaraṇaṃ karonto yasmā laḷanto kīḷanto nāma hoti, tasmā dutiye atthavikappe laḷātiādi vuttaṃ. Dānappadānādīnīti ettha niccadānaṃ dānaṃ nāma, visesadānaṃ padānaṃ nāma, ādi-saddena sīlādīni saṅgaṇhāti.
30 十四种食,就是:僧团食、指定食、邀请食、筹食、半月食、伍波萨他食、伍波萨他后一日食、来客食、出行食、病者食、看护病者食、精舍食、常职食、轮值食,这些就是十四种食。在这里还要知道:在依止住所等三种资具的情况下,通过受持阿兰若支等主要头陀支,其余的头陀支也就已经被包含在内了。跋耆,就是跋耆诸王。在跋耆中,这是就地区而说的复数,意思是在名为跋耆的地区。五种欲乐本身因为可以享受、可以使用,所以叫受用和享用,而女人、衣物等则是它们的辅助用具,因此说他们以这些……等等。最上乞食性,是因为具足由其余头陀支所围绕的最上乞食头陀支,所以说想要行次第乞食。巴利
30.Cuddasa bhattānīti saṅghabhattaṃ uddesabhattaṃ nimantanaṃ salākaṃ pakkhikaṃ uposathikaṃ pāṭipadikaṃ āgantukaṃ gamikaṃ gilānaṃ gilānupaṭṭhākaṃ vihāra-dhura-vārabhattanti imāni cuddasa bhattāni. Ettha ca senāsanādipaccayattayanissitesu āraññakaṅgādipadhānaṅgānaṃ gahaṇavasena sesadhutaṅgānipi gahitāneva hontīti veditabbaṃ. Vajjīnanti vajjīrājūnaṃ. Vajjīsūti janapadāpekkhaṃ bahuvacanaṃ, vajjīnāmake janapadeti attho. Pañcakāmaguṇāyeva upabhuñjitabbato paribhuñjitabbato ca upabhogaparibhogā, itthivatthādīni ca tadupakaraṇānīti āha ‘‘yehi tesa’’ntiādi. Ukkaṭṭhapiṇḍapātikattāti sesadhutaṅgaparivāritena ukkaṭṭhapiṇḍapātikadhutaṅgena samannāgatattā, tenāha ‘‘sapadānacāraṃ caritukāmo’’ti.
31 31.“dosā”就是夜晚。在那里,住过一夜、度过一夜的,叫“隔夜食”;或者,到了黎明之后、已经过了黎明时分的,也叫“隔夜食”,所以说“超过一夜的……”等等。巴利
31.Dosāti ratti. Tattha abhivutthaṃ parivusitaṃ ābhidosikaṃ, abhidosaṃ vā paccūsakālaṃ gato patto atikkanto ābhidosiko, tenāha ekarattātikkantassa vātiādi.
32 32. 所谓“水粥”,是指喝的水和洗浴用的水,以及粥。“如是”在这里是并列连接的意思。“不认可”就是不相信。“不忍”就是无法忍受。巴利
32.Udakakañjiyanti pānīyaparibhojanīyaudakañca yāgu ca. Tathāti samuccayatthe.Anokappanaṃ asaddahanaṃ, amarisanaṃ asahanaṃ.
34 “派生词缀省略”是指:本来应该说“从祖父传来的”是“petāmaha”,但把作为派生词缀标志的“e”音省略掉了,这就是它的意思。那些财物被人拿走的人,就是债权人。“被障碍”,是指被“别去、别吃”这类话挡住,意思是受到逼迫。巴利
34.Taddhitalopanti pitāmahato āgataṃ ‘‘petāmaha’’nti vattabbe taddhitapaccayanimittassa e-kārassa lopaṃ katvāti attho. Yesaṃ santakaṃ dhanaṃ gahitaṃ, te iṇāyikā. Palibuddhoti ‘mā gaccha mā bhuñjā’tiādinā katāvaraṇo, pīḷitoti attho.
35 “自己”就是亲自。属于主人、属于财产所有者的这个财物,就是财产。那也就是资产。巴利
35.Attanāti sayaṃ. Sapatino dhanasāmino idaṃ sāpateyyaṃ, dhanaṃ. Tadeva vibhavo.
36 “被破坏”是指:那些从未被执取过的(色法)才被破坏。所谓“父亲所给予的结生”,意思是:依靠父亲所给予的精液而生起的有情,它的结生也因此被称为父亲所给予的——这就是这里要表达的意思。或者,这里因为精液是结生的所依,所以把精液本身称为“结生”,因此说“迅速安住”。因为并不是说有情只会在父亲交合的那一刹那出生,而是说精液本身就有那样确定安住的规律。精液安住之后,经过七天,或者大约半个月,它就只是成为结胎(形成胎形)的场域/基址,因为母亲的肉与少许血常时存在之故。因之前已有已制学处存在,故“未制学处时”意指“在未设立第一巴拉基格学处时”,这是所说的意思。所谓“如此之类”,是指具有如此重大性质,即成为巴拉基格及桑喀地谢思的所依事,因此说“其余仅在五小罪蕴中制定”。此即“Yaṃ ādīnavanti”的句式连接。“身表的推动”,是指由身表所生起的动摇。巴利
36.Bhijjantīti agahitapubbā eva bhijjanti. Dinnāpi paṭisandhīti pitarā dinnaṃ sukkaṃ nissāya uppannassa sattassa paṭisandhipi tena dinnā nāma hotīti vuttaṃ. Sukkameva vā idha paṭisandhinissayattā ‘‘paṭisandhī’’ti vuttaṃ, tenāha ‘‘khippaṃ patiṭṭhātī’’ti. Na hi pitu saṃyogakkhaṇeyeva sattassa uppattiniyamo atthi sukkameva tathā patiṭṭhānaniyamato. Sukke pana patiṭṭhite yāva satta divasāni, aḍḍhamāsamattaṃ vā, taṃ gabbhasaṇṭhānassa khettameva hoti mātu maṃsassa lohitalesassa sabbadāpi vijjamānattā. Pubbepi paññattasikkhāpadānaṃ sabbhāvato apaññatte sikkhāpadeti imassa paṭhamapārājikasikkhāpade aṭṭhapiteti attho vutto. Evarūpanti evaṃ garukasabhāvaṃ, pārājikasaṅghādisesavatthubhūtanti attho, tenāha ‘‘avasese pañcakhuddakāpattikkhandhe eva paññapesī’’ti. Yaṃ ādīnavanti sambandho. Kāyaviññatticopanatoti kāyaviññattiyā nibbattacalanato.
正是由于这个限定词“由此”,为了说明那些被排除的受孕原因,才说了“然而什么”等话。其中,双方因欲贪而发生身相触,这已经说过了。只有女人因欲贪而抚摸脐部,这另外单独说了。因为娑摩智者的母亲在渴望生子时,在抚摸脐部的时刻,心中充满了欲贪,否则儿子就不可能出生。也有人说:“帝释天神为她制造了生起欲贪的因缘。”或者应当理解为,这个抚摸脐部是就所依之事而言,所以与身相触分开来说。摩灯伽智者因“吉祥视”女抚摸脐部,而有了曼达亚的诞生。灯光王的母亲脐部被蝎子爬过,由此而有了灯光王的诞生,因此说了“以同样的方式”等话。巴利
Tenevāti avadhāraṇena yāni gabbhaggahaṇakāraṇāni nivattitāni, tānipi dassetuṃ kiṃ panātiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ubhayesaṃ chandarāgavasena kāyasaṃsaggo vutto. Itthiyā eva chandarāgavasena nābhiparāmasanaṃ visuṃ vuttaṃ. Sāmapaṇḍitassa hi mātā puttuppattiyā sañjātādarā nābhiparāmasanakāle kāmarāgasamākulacittā ahosi, itarathā puttuppattiyā eva asambhavato. ‘‘Sakko cassā kāmarāgasamuppattinimittāni akāsī’’tipi vadanti, vatthuvasena vā etaṃ nābhiparāmasanaṃ kāyasaṃsaggato visuṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Mātaṅgapaṇḍitassa diṭṭhamaṅgalikāya nābhiparāmasanena maṇḍabyassa nibbatti ahosi. Caṇḍapajjotamātu nābhiyaṃ vicchikā pharitvā gatā, tena caṇḍapajjotassa nibbatti ahosīti āha eteneva nayenātiādi.
这些女子是苏丁那的前妻。所谓“为了谁”,是指为了那件淫行。说“父母聚集在一起”,这是显示精液的产生;说“母亲正逢经期”,这是显示经血的产生。所谓“乾闼婆”,这里指的是将要投生到那里的有情,意思是“应当前往者”,这里把 ta 音变成了 dha 音。另一种说法是,所谓乾闼婆,就像戏班演员一样,他们在各种存在中到处受取不同的形态,所以这个有情也被称为“乾闼婆”;他在父母交合的那一刻之后,七天之内投生到那里,所以说他“已经现前”。所谓“入胎”,是指与羯罗蓝一同生起的结生识。这里所说的“胎”就是这个意思,就像“她因此受胎”等说法中那样。连接起来就是:他的那件淫行。在巴利原文“诸位比丘僧团实在没有过失,实在没有祸患”之后,应当补上“在那个僧团中”,然后理解为苏丁那……生起了过患。“伊提”这个助词组合起来,就是表达“如是”这个意思。“片刻之间”是“刹那”的同义词。天人的呼声即使高到梵天界,对人类来说也像他们的色身一样,不是人类所能感知的。因此应当知道,是在苏丁那说了之后,众人才知道的。巴利
Ayanti sudinnassa purāṇadutiyikā. Yaṃ sandhāyāti yaṃ ajjhācāraṃ sandhāya. Mātāpitaro ca sannipatitā hontīti iminā sukkassa sambhavaṃ dīpeti, mātā ca utunī hotīti iminā soṇitassa. Gandhabboti tatrupago satto adhippeto, gantabboti vuttaṃ hoti, ta-kārassa cettha dha-kāro kato. Atha vā gandhabbā nāma raṅganaṭā, te viya tatra tatra bhavesu nānāvesaggahaṇato ayampi ‘‘gandhabbo’’ti vutto, so mātāpitūnaṃ sannipātakkhaṇato pacchāpi sattāhabbhantare tatra upapanno ‘‘paccupaṭṭhito’’ti vutto. Gabbhassāti kalalarūpasahitassa paṭisandhiviññāṇassa. Tañhi idha ‘‘gabbho’’ti adhippetaṃ sā tena gabbhaṃ gaṇhītiādīsu (pārā. 36) viya. Assa taṃ ajjhācāranti sambandho. Pāḷiyaṃ nirabbudo vata bho bhikkhusaṅgho nirādīnavoti imassa anantaraṃ tasmiṃ bhikkhusaṅgheti ajjhāharitvā sudinnena…pe… ādīnavo uppāditoti yojanā veditabbā. Itihāti nipātasamudāyassa evanti idaṃ atthabhavanaṃ. Muhuttenāti idaṃ khaṇenāti padassa vevacanaṃ. Yāva brahmalokā abbhuggatopi devānaṃ tāvamahanto saddo tesaṃ rūpaṃ viya manussānaṃ gocaro na hoti. Tasmā pacchā sudinnena vutte eva jāniṃsūti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
37 “道梵行”:所谓以道为基础的三学,这是从近处说的,因为应当终生修行的就是这三学。“不坏”:指不在诵经等事务上忙碌。“截断者”:就是断脚的人,或者断躯干的人。“思惟”:用这个词显示出“愁思”一词是动词性质。因此,引出“变得消瘦……且愁思”中的“ca”(且)字,应当这样连接巴利原文。巴利
37.Maggabrahmacariyanti maggapadaṭṭhānaṃ sikkhattayameva upacārato vuttaṃ tasseva yāvajīvaṃ caritabbattā. Avipphārikoti uddesādīsu abyāvaṭo. Vahacchinnoti chinnapādo, chinnakhandho vā. Cintayīti iminā pajjhāyīti padassa kiriyāpadattaṃ dasseti. Tena ‘‘kiso ahosi…pe… pajjhāyi cā’’ti ca-kāraṃ ānetvā pāḷiyojanā kātabbā.
38 38. 在群体和人群的聚会中,聚集就叫“群聚”,那本身就是戏论,因此叫“群聚戏论”。Yassa 的意思是“凡属于他的”。Kathāphāsukā 是指以亲密无间的方式轻松交谈,意思是愉快的对话。所谓“取色依靠四大种色而得以庄严和饱满”,因此说“明净等”。Dāni 这个虚词在这里表达 pana 的意思,因为表示“现在”的词被单独提出来说,所以注释说“so pana tvaṃ”。No 这个字也和 nu 一样有疑问的意思,所以说“kacci nu tvaṃ”。Tameva 就是指渴望在家人身份的那种特相。Anabhiratimeva 中的 eva,是为了排除前者、显示除此之外还有其他不喜存在,因此说了“增上善”等,止观就叫增上善。Idaṃ pana 等,是显示下文要说的特别之处。Pariyāyavacanamattaṃ 就只是词义上的解说而已。巴利
38. Gaṇe janasamāgame sannipātanaṃ gaṇasaṅgaṇikā, sāva papañcā, tena gaṇasaṅgaṇikāpapañcena. Yassāti ye assa. Kathāphāsukāti vissāsikabhāvena phāsukakathā, sukhasambhāsāti attho. Upādārūpaṃ bhūtarūpamukheneva mandanaṃ pīnanañca hotīti āha pasādaiccādi. Dānīti nipāto idha pana-saddatthe vattati takkālavācino etarahi-padassa visuṃ vuccamānattāti āha ‘‘so pana tva’’nti. No-saddopi nu-saddo viya pucchanatthoti āha ‘‘kacci nu tva’’nti. Tamevāti gihibhāvapatthanālakkhaṇameva. Anabhiratimevāti eva-kārena nivattitāya pana tadaññāya anabhiratiyā vijjamānattaṃ dassetuṃ adhikusalānantiādi vuttaṃ, samathavipassanā adhikusalā nāma. Idaṃ panātiādi upari vattabbavisesadassanaṃ. Pariyāyavacanamattanti saddatthakathanamattaṃ.
对于那法,意思是:当它这样为离贪而被宣说时。名,是责难的意思。出世间涅槃,是用来区别前面“为离贪”等所说的烦恼灭尽涅槃。依生而起、正在生起的醉,就以能令人醉的意义称为醉慢。由“我是男人”而现起的慢,是男人慢。有人说:依于有能力亲近非正法的慢,或者贪本身就是男人慢。初字包含力慢等。三有轮回,就是在三地中,业、烦恼、果报以转起之义为轮回。离贪,就是消失。生处,就是卵生等;不过,它们之所以被称为生处,是因为那些有情虽然不混杂,却由于同一种生类而显得混杂。巴利
Tasminti dhamme, evaṃ virāgāya desite satīti attho. Nāmāti garahāyaṃ. Lokuttaranibbānanti virāgāyātiādinā vuttakilesakkhayanibbānato viseseti. Jātiṃ nissāya uppajjanakamāno eva madajananaṭṭhena madoti mānamado. ‘‘Ahaṃ puriso’’ti pavatto māno purisamado. ‘‘Asaddhammasevanāsamatthataṃ nissāya māno, rāgo eva vā purisamado’’ti keci. Ādi-saddena balamadādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Tebhūmakavaṭṭanti tīsu bhūmīsu kammakilesavipākā pavattanaṭṭhena vaṭṭaṃ. Virajjatīti vigacchati. Yoniyoti aṇḍajādayo, tā pana yavanti tāhi sattā amissitāpi samānajātitāya missitā hontīti ‘‘yoniyo’’ti vuttā.
从知遍知、审察遍知、断遍知的角度来说:在这里,依靠特相等方式把握有因缘条件的名色,这叫知遍知;依靠聚观照等方式生起的世间观智,叫审察遍知;圣道叫断遍知。不过在这里,知与审察的作用在道的刹那也以无痴而成办,所以三种遍知都是就圣道而说的,因此才说“只说了出世间道”。“于诸欲有堕落性”的意思是:在所依的欲中,对被称为堕落性的净美等行相,执取彼行相的渴爱。这里是通过所缘境来把握有境者。“于三处”,就是指“为离贪而说法……不为取著”这样所说的那些地方。巴利
Ñātatīraṇapahānavasenāti ettha lakkhaṇādivasena sappaccayanāmarūpapariggaho ñātapariññā nāma. Kalāpasammasanādivasena pavattā lokiyavipassanā tīraṇapariññā nāma. Ariyamaggo pahānapariññā nāma. Idha pana ñātatīraṇakiccānampi asammohato maggakkhaṇe sijjhanato ariyamaggameva sandhāya tividhāpi pariññā vuttā, teneva ‘‘lokuttaramaggova kathito’’ti vuttaṃ. Kāmesu pātabyatānanti vatthukāmesu pātabyatāsaṅkhātānaṃ subhādiākārānaṃ tadākāragāhikānaṃ taṇhānanti attho. Visayamukhena hettha visayino gahitā. Tīsu ṭhānesūti ‘‘virāgāya dhammo desito…pe… no saupādānāyā’’ti evaṃ vuttesu.
39 “为了投入秽教”意思是“为了投入嗔怒”。“秽”是愤怒的别名,它的教就是秽教,也就是依嗔怒而说的呵责。违犯本身就是越轨。“成就沙门性的诸法”指能使人成为沙门的惭、愧等法。在巴利文中,因为和“如何”这个词连在一起,所以用了未来时“你将不能”;也有人说是和“名”这个词连在一起。所谓“极重的苦果”,是说在家人即使不太重的业,对出家人来说,因为违越了世尊的教令,又破坏了已受持的三学,就成了大罪,所以这样说。在水中的就是水,有洗涤的作用,所以说“水的作用”等等。“你将进入”是未来时,因为和“名”这个词连在一起而这样说,所以注释说“应当和‘名’这个词连接”。作为难护等的原因的不防护,这里用“难护”等词来表达,是以原因来显示结果的修辞手法,所以说“作为难护等之基础的不防护”。“我”指自身。“难护”指自己以及护持者都难以护持。与众生和烦恼聚集、会合叫“众杂聚”,所以说“众杂聚”等等。“八懈怠事的圆满”:这里,“应做的事”算一件,“没做”算一件,“应走的路”算一件,“没走”算一件,“我没得到食物的满足”算一件,“得到了”算一件,“我生病了”算一件,“病刚好不久”算一件,这些就叫八懈怠事。在这里,懈怠用“怠”这个词来表达。即使没有表状态的后缀,动词的含义也能被理解,就像“布的净”那样。作为一切烦恼损减之因的离轭,就是作为贪等一切烦恼损减之因的涅槃,意思是涅槃之义。与防护和舍断相关联,就是具备戒防护等五种防护,以及止持舍断等五种舍断。不属于经藏所收,就是在三藏中不算作巴利经藏,也没有被结集者收入,因此说“离巴利”。这也显示出,在义注中已按适当方式收摄了。这样的散说就是义注的根本。所谓“随入法说”,就是在各种场合中不断插入、以种种方式宣说的法说,因此说“世尊据说”等等。以拒绝为意图,就是对已制定的学处也想“这有什么用”,以践踏之心对待。巴利
39.Kalisāsanāropanatthāyāti dosāropanatthāya. Kalīti kodhassa nāmaṃ, tassa sāsanaṃ kalisāsanaṃ, kodhavasena vuccamānā garahā. Ajjhācārova vītikkamo. Samaṇakaraṇānaṃ dhammānanti samaṇabhāvakarānaṃ hirottappādidhammānaṃ. Pāḷiyaṃ kathaṃ-saddayogena na sakkhissasīti anāgatavacanaṃ kataṃ, ‘‘nāma-saddayogenā’’tipi vadanti. Ativiya dukkhavipākanti gahaṭṭhānaṃ nātisāvajjampi kammaṃ pabbajitānaṃ bhagavato āṇāvītikkamato ceva samādinnasikkhattayavināsanato ca mahāsāvajjaṃ hotīti vuttaṃ. Udake bhavaṃ odakaṃ, dhovanakiccanti āha udakakiccantiādi. Samāpajjissasīti anāgatavacanaṃ nāma-saddayogena katanti āha ‘‘nāma-saddena yojetabba’’nti. Dubbharatādīnaṃ hetubhūto asaṃvaro idha dubbharatādi-saddena vutto kāraṇe kāriyopacārenāti āha ‘‘dubbharatādīnaṃ vatthubhūtassa asaṃvarassā’’ti. Attāti attabhāvo. Dubbharatanti attanā upaṭṭhākehi ca dukkhena bharitabbataṃ. Sattehi kilesehi ca saṅgaṇanaṃ samodhānaṃ saṅgaṇikāti āha gaṇasaṅgaṇikāyātiādi. Aṭṭhakusītavatthupāripūriyāti ettha kammaṃ kātabbanti ekaṃ, tathā akāsinti, maggo gantabboti agamāsinti, nālatthaṃ bhojanassa pāripūrinti, alatthanti, uppanno me ābādhoti, aciravuṭṭhito gelaññāti ekanti imāni aṭṭha kusītavatthūni nāma. Ettha ca kosajjaṃ kusīta-saddena vuttaṃ. Vināpi hi bhāvajotanapaccayaṃ bhāvattho viññāyati yathā paṭassa sukkanti. Sabbakilesāpacayabhūtāya vivaṭṭāyāti rāgādisabbakilesānaṃ apacayahetubhūtāya nibbānāya, nibbānatthanti attho. Saṃvarappahānapaṭisaṃyuttanti sīlasaṃvarādīhi pañcahi saṃvarehi ceva tadaṅgappahānādīhi pañcahi pahānehi ca upetaṃ. Asuttanta vinibaddhanti tīsu piṭakesu pāḷisaṅkhātasuttantavasena aracitaṃ, saṅgītikārehi ca anāropitaṃ, tenāha ‘‘pāḷivinimutta’’nti. Tena ca aṭṭhakathāsu yathānurūpaṃ saṅgahitanti dasseti. Evarūpā hi pakiṇṇakadesanā aṭṭhakathāya mūlaṃ. Okkantikadhammadesanā nāma tasmiṃ tasmiṃ pasaṅge otāretvā otāretvā nānānayehi kathiyamānā dhammadesanā, tenāha bhagavā kirātiādi. Paṭikkhipanādhippāyāti paññattampi sikkhāpadaṃ ‘‘kimetenā’’ti maddanacittā.
“依所说的义”是指依安立与证得的方式。为了说明在《学处分别》中,依“那时对欲邪行不乐、远离”等语所显示的远离,以及依“那时有思、有思量”等语所显示的思,还有依“对远离欲邪行者,有触……乃至不散乱”等语所显示的触等诸法,都是学处,所以才说“这个义理应当依照《学处分别》中所说的方式来理解”。有人说:“‘那里的名身、句身’这一说法,是出自《大义注》。”名身就是名的集合,也就是名的施设,其余几个词也只是它的同义词。学处的部分,就是所说的远离等法,以及阐明它们的语句。巴利
Vuttatthavasenāti patiṭṭhāadhigamupāyavasena. Sikkhāpadavibhaṅge yā tasmiṃ samaye kāmesumicchācārā ārati viratītiādinā (vibha. 706) niddiṭṭhaviratiyo ceva, yā tasmiṃ samaye cetanā sañcetanātiādinā (vibha. 704) niddiṭṭhacetanā ca, kāmesumicchācārā viramantassa phasso…pe… avikkhepotiādinā (vibha. 705) niddiṭṭhaphassādidhammā ca sikkhāpadanti dassetuṃ ‘‘ayañca attho sikkhāpadavibhaṅge vuttanayeneva veditabbo’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Yo tattha nāmakāyo padakāyoti idaṃ mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vutta’’nti vadanti. Nāmakāyoti nāmasamūho nāmapaññattiyeva, sesānipi tasseva vevacanāni. Sikkhākoṭṭhāsoti viratiādayo vuttā tappakāsakañca vacanaṃ.
“以义利”是指殊胜的利益、殊胜的功德,而这些又是制定学处的因,所以说“以因”。如果没有乐住,就没有共住,因此“共住”说的就是乐住。“恶戒人”指无戒者和戒被染污者。涉及巴拉基格学处时,指的是无戒者;涉及其余学处时,因为种种违犯而成为缺戒、穿戒等状态,所以指的是戒被染污者。应当知道,这里依这两种情况,说的都是无惭者。因为一切学处都是依十种义利而制定的,所以下文“依恶戒人”处也是同样的道理,因此以通于一切学处的方式,说了“谁……将制止……”之义。其中,“羞惭”指无光彩、低头。“以法”等中,“法”指真实之事。“律”指举罪与忆念。“师教”指白文的成就及唱说的成就。“生怀疑者”指生起疑惑者。“被逼恼”指受到逼迫。依恶戒人,伍波萨他不立,自恣不立,僧甘马不得进行,和合不成,因此以这说明:与无惭者一起,不得作伍波萨他等一切僧甘马,因为那是法的受用。又因伍波萨他、自恣有定时,必定应当作,所以应知从僧甘马中别别取出。无称即呵责。恶名即眷属损减。巴利
Atthavaseti hitavisese ānisaṃsavisese, te ca sikkhāpadapaññattiyā hetūti āha ‘‘kāraṇavase’’ti. Sukhavihārābhāve sahajīvanassa abhāvato sahajīvitāti sukhavihārova vutto. Dussīlapuggalāti nissīlā dūsitasīlā ca. Pārājikasikkhāpadappasaṅge hi nissīlā adhippetā, sesasikkhāpadapasaṅge tehi tehi vītikkamehi khaṇḍachiddādibhāvappattiyā dūsitasīlā adhippetā. Ubhayenapi alajjinova idha ‘‘dussīlā’’ti vuttāti veditabbā. Sabbasikkhāpadānampi dasa atthavase paṭicceva paññattattā upari dussīlapuggale nissāyāti etthāpi eseva nayo, teneva ‘‘ye maṅkutaṃ…pe… niggahessatī’’ti sabbasikkhāpadasādhāraṇavasena attho vutto. Tattha maṅkutanti nittejataṃ adhomukhataṃ. Dhammenātiādīsu dhammoti bhūtaṃ vatthu. Vinayoti codanā ceva sāraṇā ca. Satthusāsananti ñattisampadā ceva anusāvanasampadā ca. Sandiṭṭhamānāti saṃsayaṃ āpajjamānā. Ubbāḷhāti pīḷitā. Dussīlapuggale nissāya hi uposatho na tiṭṭhati, pavāraṇā na tiṭṭhati, saṅghakammāni nappavattanti, sāmaggī na hotīti iminā alajjīhi saddhiṃ uposathādisakalasaṅghakammaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭati dhammaparibhogattāti dasseti. Uposathapavāraṇānaṃ niyatakālikatāya ca avassaṃ kattabbattā saṅghakammato visuṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Akitti garahā. Ayaso parivārahāni.
所谓十四种犍度行仪,是在行仪犍度(《小品》356等)里讲到的:客比丘行仪、常住比丘行仪、出行比丘行仪、随喜行仪、食堂行仪、托钵行仪、阿兰若行仪、卧坐处行仪、温室行仪、厕所行仪、和尚行仪、弟子行仪、阿阇梨行仪、门徒行仪——这十四种行仪,是所有比丘任何时候都应当按情况遵行的。但八十二种大行仪,只是在受到呵责甘马等特定时候才应当遵行,不是任何时候都要行。所以它们被单独计算。那些大行仪,从“我要为别住比丘制定行仪”(《小品》75)开始,到“不应授予具足戒……不应在有比丘经行的地面上经行”为止,所说的有六十六种;此后,“诸比丘,别住比丘不应与比他年长的别住比丘、应退回原本者、行敬悦者、应行敬悦者、应出罪者,在同一覆盖处共住”等(《小品》82)所说的行仪,因为与清净比丘所应行的没有不同,所以不单独计算,而是按别住比丘、年长者等不同的人各自应行的行仪,把它们归纳起来,各算作一种,共五种,这样就有七十一种行仪;再加上对受举罪甘马者所制的行仪中所说:“不应接受清净比丘的礼拜、起迎……不应接受沐浴时的擦背服务”(《小品》86),这“不接受礼拜等”算一种,以及“清净比丘不应以戒坏来毁谤”等(《小品》51)十种——这样,共有八十二种行仪。不过,在这些行仪中,有些是呵责甘马等行仪,有些是别住等行仪,以“未收摄的收摄起来”的方式,正好是八十二种。但在其他注书的地方,出现“八十犍度行仪”的说法,因为少许的增减不算在计数之内。或者,把前面十四种行仪没有收摄的、律藏中说到的一切行仪,按照它们实际是八十二种行仪或八十种行仪那样归纳起来,应当这样来理解。巴利
Cuddasa khandhakavattāni nāma vattakkhandhake (cūḷava. 356 ādayo) vuttāni āgantukavattaṃ āvāsikagamikaanumodanabhattaggapiṇḍacārikaāraññakasenāsanajantāgharavaccakuṭiupajjhāyasaddhivihārikaācariyaantevāsikavattanti imāni cuddasa vattāni, etāni ca sabbesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ sabbadā ca yathārahaṃ caritabbāni. Dve asīti mahāvattāni pana tajjanīyakammakatādikāleyeva caritabbāni, na sabbadā. Tasmā visuṃ gaṇitāni. Tāni pana ‘‘pārivāsikānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vattaṃ paññapessāmī’’ti (cūḷava. 75) ārabhitvā ‘‘na upasampādetabbaṃ…pe… na chamāya caṅkamante caṅkame caṅkamitabba’’nti vuttāvasānāni chasaṭṭhi, tato paraṃ ‘‘na, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā pārivāsikena vuḍḍhatarena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ, mūlāyapaṭikassanārahena, mānattacārikena, mānattārahena, abbhānārahena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ ekacchanne āvāse vatthabba’’ntiādinā (cūḷava. 82) vuttavattāni pakatattena caritabbehi anaññattā visuṃ agaṇetvā pārivāsikavuḍḍhatarādīsu puggalantaresu caritabbattā tesaṃ vasena sampiṇḍetvā ekekaṃ katvā gaṇitāni pañcāti ekasattativattāni ca ukkhepanīyakammakatavattesu ca vuttaṃ ‘‘na pakatattassa bhikkhuno abhivādanaṃ paccuṭṭhānaṃ…pe… nahāne piṭṭhiparikammaṃ sāditabba’’nti (cūḷava. 86) idaṃ abhivādanādīnaṃ asādiyanaṃ ekaṃ, ‘‘na pakatatto bhikkhu sīlavipattiyā anuddhaṃsetabbo’’tiādīni (cūḷava. 51) ca dasāti evaṃ dvāsīti vattāni honti, etesveva pana kānici tajjanīyakammādivattāni kānici pārivāsikādivattānīti aggahitaggahaṇena dvāsītiyeva. Aññattha pana aṭṭhakathāpadese appakaṃ ūnamadhikaṃ vā gaṇanūpagaṃ na hotīti asītikhandhakavattānīti āgataṃ. Atha vā purimehi cuddasavattehi asaṅgahitāni vinayāgatāni sabbāni vattāni yathā dvāsīti vattāni, asīti vattāni eva vā honti, tathā saṅgahetvā ñātabbāni.
所谓“防护之律”,就是戒防护、念防护、智防护、忍防护、精进防护这五种防护。因为它们各自防护应当防护、应当调伏的身恶行等,所以叫“防护”;因为调伏,所以叫“律”。所谓“断除之律”,就是彼分断除、镇伏断除、正断断除、止息断除、出离断除这五种断除。因为以舍离之义为断除,以调伏之义为律,所以叫“断除之律”。所谓“止息之律”,就是七种灭诤法。所谓“制定之律”,就是学处本身。因为学处正是由世尊制定学处而得到护持,只在这种制定中才得以存在。以锁链的方式,作十次连结而说,这是句子的关联。其中,因为前一个词只与紧接在后的词相连,所以像铁锁链一样,称为“锁链方式”。在十个位置中,每一个词都与其余九个词相连,所以称为“以每一词为根本”。巴利
Saṃvaravinayoti sīlasaṃvaro satisaṃvaro ñāṇasaṃvaro khantisaṃvaro vīriyasaṃvaroti pañcavidhopi saṃvaro yathāsakaṃ saṃvaritabbānaṃ vinetabbānañca kāyaduccaritādīnaṃ saṃvaraṇato saṃvaro, vinayanato vinayoti vuccati. Pahānavinayoti tadaṅgappahānaṃ vikkhambhanappahānaṃ samucchedappahānaṃ paṭippassaddhippahānaṃ nissaraṇappahānanti pañcavidhampi pahānaṃ, yasmā cāgaṭṭhena pahānaṃ, vinayanaṭṭhena vinayo, tasmā ‘‘pahānavinayo’’ti vuccati. Samathavinayoti satta adhikaraṇasamathā. Paññattivinayoti sikkhāpadameva. Tampi hi bhagavato sikkhāpadapaññattiyāva anuggahitaṃ hoti tabbhāve eva bhāvato. Saṅkhalikanayaṃ katvā dasakkhattuṃ yojanañca katvā yaṃ vuttanti sambandho. Tattha purimapurimapadassa anantarapadeneva yojitattā ayosaṅkhalikasadisanti ‘‘saṅkhalikanaya’’nti vuttaṃ. Dasasu padesu ekamekaṃ padaṃ tadavasesehi navanavapadehi yojitattā ‘‘ekekapadamūlika’’nti vuttaṃ.
关于“一百义、一百法”这句话,在这里要这样理解:在《附随》(第334页)中,从“凡是令僧团安好的,就是令僧团安乐的”等等开始,一直到“凡是为了正法久住的,就是为了律的摄受”结束,这是按照破碎轮的方式所说的锁链式方法。在那个“一根本方式”中,按照已经形成的缚轮方式,把“凡是为了律的摄受”和“凡是令僧团安好的”也连接起来,这样结成缚轮时,前面的十个法句和后面的十个义句,加起来就是二十句。不过,在“一根本方式”中,每一轮只能得到九个义句。这样一来,十轮就有九十个义句和九十个法句。这些再加上锁链式方法中所说的十个义句和十个法句,就应当知道,这就成了所说的“一百义、一百法”。
另外,《心义灯》(《心义灯》巴拉吉卡篇2.39)中,对锁链式方法和一根本方式各自都说明了一百义、一百法的连接方式。虽然那样也能成立,但和“一百义、一百法”(《附随》334)这个偈颂并不相符,因为按照道理应当说“二百义、二百法、四百词、八百智”。所以,这里应当依照此处所说的方式来理解“一百义、一百法”。
所谓“二百词”,就是:依阐明义的词有一百个,依法的词有一百个,所以是二百词。所谓“四百智”,就是:在一百义上有一百智,在一百法上有一百智,在二百词上有二百智,所以是四百智。“为了摄受未说的义”,就是总括未说的义。巴利
Atthasataṃdhammasatanti ettha yo hi so parivāre (pari. 334) yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, taṃ saṅghaphāsūti ādiṃkatvā yaṃ saddhammaṭṭhitiyā, taṃ vinayānuggahāyāti pariyosānaṃ khaṇḍacakkavaseneva saṅkhalikanayo vutto, tasmiṃ ekamūlakanaye āgatabaddhacakkanayena yaṃ vinayānuggahāya, taṃ saṅghasuṭṭhūti idampi yojetvā baddhacakke kate purimapurimāni dasa dhammapadāni, pacchimapacchimāni dasa atthapadāni cāti vīsati padāni honti. Ekamūlakanaye pana ekasmiṃ vāre naveva atthapadāni labbhanti. Evaṃ dasahi vārehi navuti atthapadāni navuti dhammapadāni ca honti, tāni saṅkhalikanaye vuttehi dasahi atthapadehi dasahi dhammapadehi ca saddhiṃ yojitāni yathāvuttaṃ atthasataṃ dhammasatañca hontīti veditabbaṃ. Yaṃ panettha sāratthadīpaniyaṃ (sārattha ṭī. pārājikakaṇḍa 2.39) saṅkhalikanayepi ekamūlakanayepi paccekaṃ atthasatassa dhammasatassa yojanāmukhaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ tathā siddhepi atthasataṃ dhammasatanti (pari. 334) gāthāya na sameti dve atthasatāni dve dhammasatāni cattāri niruttisatāni aṭṭha ñāṇasatānīti vattabbato. Tasmā idha vuttanayeneva atthasataṃ dhammasatanti vuttanti gahetabbaṃ. Dve ca niruttisatānīti atthajotikānaṃ niruttīnaṃ vasena niruttisataṃ, dhammabhūtānaṃ niruttīnañca vasena niruttisatanti dve niruttisatāni. Cattāri ca ñāṇasatānīti atthasate ñāṇasataṃ, dhammasate ñāṇasataṃ, dvīsu niruttisatesu dve ñāṇasatānīti cattāri ñāṇasatāni. Atirekānayanatthoti avuttasamuccayattho.
母猴故事的注释巴利
Makkaṭīvatthukathāvaṇṇanā
40 40. 所谓“于多义而用现在时语”,意思是:有时曾经受用过,后来并没有厌离,因为日复一日都有继续受用的欲望,所以即使在当下没有受用的时刻,也像“这里末罗族人在战斗”这类说法一样,依据它的不间断性和频繁性,而说“他受用”,也就是用现在时来表达,这就是这句话的意思。“游行”就是到处行走。巴利
40.Pacuratthe hi vattamānavacananti ekadā paṭisevitvā pacchā anoramitvā divase divase sevanicchāya vattamānattā sevanāya abhāvakkhaṇepi iha mallā yujjhantītiādīsu viya abbocchinnataṃ bāhullavuttitañca upādāya paṭisevatīti vattamānavacanaṃ katanti attho. Āhiṇḍantāti vicarantā.
41 Sahoḍḍhaggahito 就是 sabhaṇḍaggahito,或者这正是它的读法。那条学处本身就是这样:不区分人、非人等等任何种类的补特伽罗,而是笼统地说“若有比丘行淫欲法”,因此,对于人、非人、畜生中的女人、男人、黄门、二根人,在三十种道中行淫欲的人,那条学处就是断除根本的——这就是它的意旨。由此说明:那些依事缘而说、为求易于理解的内容,是以开显随制与根本制意趣的方式而说,也就是以显示殊胜之义的方式而说。这里,āmasana 是指仅仅碰触。比它更强的是 phusana。而 ghaṭṭana 则比它更强,是身与身相触。以上这一切,就是指由染爱所生起的观看等等一切。巴利
41.Sahoḍḍhaggahitoti sabhaṇḍaggahito, ayameva vā pāṭho. Taṃ sikkhāpadaṃ tatheva hotīti manussāmanussādipuggalavisesaṃ kiñci anupādiyitvā sāmaññato ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭiseveyyā’’ti (pārā. 39) vuttattā manussāmanussatiracchānagatānaṃ itthipurisapaṇḍakaubhatobyañjanānaṃ tiṃsavidhepi magge methunaṃ sevantassa taṃ sikkhāpadaṃ mūlacchejjakaraṃ hoti evāti adhippāyo. Etena yaṃ anupaññattimūlapaññattiyā eva adhippāyappakāsanavasena subodhatthāya vatthuvasena pavattānaṃ visesatthajotakavasenāti dassitaṃ hoti. Āmasanaṃ āmaṭṭhamattaṃ. Tato daḷhataraṃ phusanaṃ. Ghaṭṭanaṃ pana tato daḷhataraṃ katvā sarīrena sarīrassa saṅghaṭṭanaṃ. Taṃ sabbampīti anurāgena pavattitaṃ dassanādisabbampi.
42 42. 为了用一个共同的表述,说明杀生等有心学处和饮酒等无心学处(《巴吉帝亚》326等)都是世间违犯,所以说:“在有心这一类里,心唯独是不善的,那就叫作世间违犯。”这里说的“在有心这一类里”,本来只适合用来指无心学处——因为只有那种学处才可能出现有心的情况;然而在有心学处中,比如无意识地行走等时候,世间也会说是在杀生。因此,也把无心这一类假想出来,就有心和无心两种学处合在一起说,才说“在有心这一类里”。否则的话,有心学处的世间违犯这一特征,在这个句子里就没有被说到。可是如果说“在有心这一类里,心唯独是不善的”,那么有心学处的心就唯独是不善的;其余学处则只在有心这一类里有不善的定则,在无心那一类里则不是这样。在这里应当知道:心按具体情况,可能是善,也可能是不善,也可能是无记——这个意思从道理上就能成立。而“在有心这一类里”,应当理解为就“以了知事相而违犯的心”所说的“在有心这一类里”,不是就“了知施设的心”所说的。如果按后一种理解,就会导致一切学处都成了世间违犯。因为,明明知道“这是被禁止的,不可以做”还去做的人,即使是在施设违犯的情况下,也会由于不尊重而只生起嗔心,这样一来,这句话就成了没有意义,而且会变成只需要说“一切学处都是世间违犯”就够了。巴利
42.Pāṇātipātādisacittakasikkhāpadānaṃ surāpānādiacittakasikkhāpadānañca (pāci. 326 ādayo) ekeneva lakkhaṇavacanena lokavajjataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yassa sacittakapakkhe cittaṃ akusalameva hoti, taṃ lokavajjaṃ nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha sacittakapakkheti idaṃ kiñcāpi acittakasikkhāpadaṃ sandhāyeva vattuṃ yuttaṃ tasseva sacittakapakkhasambhavato, tathāpi sacittakasikkhāpadānampi asañcicca caṅkamanādīsu loke pāṇaghātavohārasambhavena acittakapakkhaṃ parikappetvā ubhinnampi sacittakācittakasikkhāpadānaṃ sādhāraṇavasena ‘‘sacittakapakkhe’’ti vuttaṃ. Itarathā sacittakasikkhāpadānaṃ imasmiṃ vākye lokavajjatālakkhaṇaṃ na vuttaṃ siyā. ‘‘Sacittakapakkhe cittaṃ akusalamevā’’ti vutte pana sacittakasikkhāpadānaṃ cittaṃ akusalameva, itaresaṃ sacittakapakkheyeva akusalaniyamo, na acittakapakkhe. Tattha pana yathāsambhavaṃ kusalaṃ vā siyā, akusalaṃ vā, abyākataṃ vāti ayamattho sāmatthiyato sijjhatīti veditabbaṃ. Sacittakapakkheti vatthuvītikkamavijānanacittena sacittakapakkheti gahetabbaṃ, na paṇṇattivijānanacittena tathā sati sabbasikkhāpadānampi lokavajjatāpasaṅgato. ‘‘Paṭikkhittamidaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti jānantassa hi paṇṇattivajjepi anādariyavasena paṭighacittameva uppajjati, tasmā idaṃ vākyaṃ niratthakameva siyā sabbasikkhāpadānipi lokavajjānīti ettakamattasseva vattabbatāpasaṅgato.
在这里,由于并没有定下“只有在有心分的情况下,心才是不善”这条规则,所以不能断定说:在饮酒等无心分的情况下,心就一定不是不善。然而,只是就有心分来说,心确实就是不善,而不是善等——这样,这里的规则才成立。这样一来,对于不知道是酒而喝的人,仍然是以不善心在喝;比丘尼不知道那是香、色等而涂抹身体,即使没有不善心,涂抹也仍然构成犯戒;这两种情况都可能犯戒,这一点也就说得通了。
不过,《心义灯》(Sāratthadīpanī,巴拉基格品 2.42)里说:“从‘在有心分,心就是不善’这句话可以知道,在无心分,因为不了知事相,所以并没有‘心就是不善’这条规则。”这个说法并不合理。因为在十三种无心分的世间违犯中,只有饮酒这一条,即使在无心分也有不善心的规则,其余十二条则不是这样,因为它们即使以不善等心也可能犯。
有人不接受这条规则,也不喜欢这种说法,为了把这条规则说成是别人的意图,就讲:“如果在无心学处的无心分中,心也一定是不善,那么‘在有心分’这个限定语就没有意义了。”这种说法本身才是没有意义的,因为并没有人主张这样的规则。没有哪位精通文法的人会主张这种规则,以至于说出“在有心分这个限定语就没有意义了”这样的话;他们主张的是:在有心分,心就是不善;在无心分,心则不定,可能是不善,也可能是善等其他情况。这样一来,“在有心分”这个限定语也就有意义了。无心学处因为有心分的不善规则而成为世间违犯;其中,只有饮酒即使在无心分也是世间违犯且是不善心,其余的则只在有心分才如此——这种说法也不相违。所以,这里并没有什么说不通的地方。巴利
Ettha ca sacittakapakkheyeva cittaṃ akusalanti niyamassa akatattā surāpānādīsu acittakapakkhe cittaṃ akusalaṃ na hotevāti na sakkā niyametuṃ, kevalaṃ pana sacittakapakkhe cittaṃ akusalameva, na kusalādīti evamettha niyamo sijjhati, evañca surāti ajānitvā pivantānampi akusalacitteneva pānaṃ gandhavaṇṇakādibhāvaṃ ajānitvā limpantīnaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ vināpi akusalacittena limpanañca, ubhayatthāpi āpattisambhavo ca samatthito hoti. Yaṃ pana sāratthadīpaniyaṃ (sārattha. ṭī. pārājikakaṇḍa 2.42) ‘‘sacittakapakkhe cittaṃ akusalamevāti vacanato acittakassa vatthuajānanavasena acittakapakkhe cittaṃ akusalamevāti ayaṃ niyamo natthīti viññāyatī’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ na yuttaṃ . Acittakesu hi terasasu lokavajjesu surāpānasseva acittakapakkhepi akusalacittaniyamo, na itaresaṃ dvādasannaṃ akusalādicittenāpi āpajjitabbato. Yaṃ pana evaṃ kenaci anicchamānaṃ saddatopi apatīyamānamimaṃ niyamaṃ parādhippāyaṃ katvā dassetuṃ ‘‘yadi hi acittakassa acittakapakkhepi cittaṃ akusalameva siyā, sacittakapakkheti idaṃ visesanaṃ niratthakaṃ siyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ, taṃ niratthakameva evaṃ niyamassa kenaci anadhippetattā. Na hi koci saddasatthavidū niyamaṃ icchati, yena sacittakapakkheti idaṃ visesanaṃ niratthakaṃ siyātiādi vuttaṃ bhaveyya, kintu sacittakapakkhe cittaṃ akusalameva, acittakapakkhe pana cittaṃ aniyataṃ akusalameva vā siyā, kusalādīsu vā aññataranti evameva icchati. Tena sacittakapakkheti visesanampi sātthakaṃ siyā. Acittakasikkhāpadānaṃ sacittakapakkhesu akusalaniyamena lokavajjatā ca sijjhati. Tesu ca surāpānasseva acittakapakkhepi lokavajjatā akusalacittatā ca, itaresaṃ pana sacittakapakkhe evāti vādopi na virujjhatīti na kiñcettha anupapannaṃ nāma.
这里,有人这样说:“不知道是酒而饮用……乃至……即使没有不善心也可能犯戒……乃至……因此,饮酒等无心学处不可能是世间违犯。”这种说法,以及为了成立这个道理而引用《结节》中的话并大加铺陈的内容,都不应当当作核心要义来接受,因为它和诸注释书相违背。
注释书确实这样说:“在这里,因为不知道对象,所以应知为无心;因为只应以不善心饮用,所以是世间违犯。”而注释书中说“在有心的情形下,因为只应以不善心饮用,所以是世间违犯”,这句话并不妥当。因为《巴拉基格注释》已经就一切世间违犯总说:“在有心的情形下,心唯是不善。”随后在《饮酒学处注释》中,又以“因为只应以不善心饮用”这句话,即使在无心的情形下,也特别指出其不善心性。不能说“这里总说的义理,在饮酒注释中又再说了一遍”,因为重复已经说过的内容毫无必要;而且如果真是这样,那么其他无心世间违犯学处也应该同样这样说,这就会成为过失。也不能说“在一个地方说的道理,在其他地方也因为同一特征而自然成立”,所以不能说“只在饮酒学处(《巴吉帝亚》326等)中说了”,因为无心世间违犯学处在最初的《出离学处》(《巴吉帝亚》311等)中就已经说了;或者说,正因为已经在饮酒学处中说了,而其余无心世间违犯学处也应以此方式类推,所以也不能这样说。巴利
Yaṃ panettha ‘‘surāti ajānitvā pivantassa…pe… vināpi akusalacittena āpattisambhavato…pe… surāpānādiacittakasikkhāpadānaṃ lokavajjatā na siyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yañca tamatthaṃ sādhetuṃ gaṇṭhipadesu āgatavacanaṃ dassetvā bahuṃ papañcitaṃ, taṃ na sārato paccetabbaṃ aṭṭhakathāhi viruddhattā. Tathā hi ‘‘vatthuajānanatāya cettha acittakatā veditabbā akusaleneva pātabbatāya lokavajjatā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yañcetassa ‘‘sacittakapakkhe akusaleneva pātabbato lokavajjatā’’ti vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāvacanaṃ, taṃ na sundaraṃ. ‘‘Sacittakapakkhe cittaṃ akusalamevā’’ti sabbesaṃ lokavajjānaṃ idheva pārājikaṭṭhakathāya sāmaññato vatvā surāpānasikkhāpadaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘akusaleneva pātabbatāyā’’ti evaṃ acittakapakkhepi akusalacittatāya visesetvā vuttattā. Na hi ‘‘sāmaññato idha vuttova attho puna surāpānaṭṭhakathāyampi vutto’’ti sakkā vattuṃ vuttasseva puna vacane payojanābhāvā, tadaññesupi acittakalokavajjesu vattabbatāpasaṅgato ca, nāpi ekattha vutto nayo tadaññesupi ekalakkhaṇatāya vutto eva hotīti ‘‘surāpānasikkhāpadeyeva (pāci. 326 ādayo) vutto’’ti sakkā vattuṃ acittakalokavajjānaṃ sabbapaṭhame uyyuttasikkhāpadeyeva (pāci. 311 ādayo) vattabbato, surāpānasikkhāpadeyeva vā vatvā eseva nayo sesesu acittakalokavajjesupīti atidisitabbato ca.
再者,说“已说过的义理”时,应当说“在有心的这一类里,只以不善心而应饮用”,按照前面所说的次第来说,因为再次宣说是为了消除疑惑等。而在学处的范围内,必须加以区分之后才说,否则犯与不犯等的差别就难以了知。正如在《比丘尼分别注》中,对“观看歌舞”等学处,在有心的这一类里,特别区分出世间违犯性和不善心性而说:“即使没有心也可能犯,所以是无心;但当有心时,只以不善心而犯,所以既是世间违犯,也是不善心。”对饮酒却不是这样说的。对饮酒,是就两类立场共通而说“只以不善心而应饮用”,并没有特别区分说“在有心的这一类里”。因此,正是为了显示饮酒在有心和无心两类立场上都是世间违犯且是不善心,才单独说“只以不善心而应饮用,故是世间违犯”,这完全成立。正是依据这一点,若认为《心义灯》中“在有心的这一类里,只以不善心而应饮用,故是世间违犯”这句话正是表达这个意旨,那么正是基于这个意旨,在其他世间违犯的无心学处中,也只说不善心性,而不说三心。因此,《比丘尼分别注》中说:“观看歌舞学处、高广大床学处、装饰品、香粉、涂油、比丘尼等为之按摩揉压——这十学处是无心的、不善心的。这里的意旨是:即使没有心也可能犯,所以是无心;但当有心时,只以不善心而犯,所以既是世间违犯,也是不善心。”这种说法也被否定,因为按照上述道理,恰恰成立相反之义。因此,应当理解为:这句话正是为了显示“饮酒即使在无心的这一类里,心也唯是不善”这一差别而说。这里的义理是:“在此,由于不知事相”中的“ca”字,是显示差别之义,与“apica”(再者)同义。因此,所谓“在其他无心的世间违犯学处中,即使没有心也可能犯,所以是无心;但当有心时,只以不善心而犯,所以既是世间违犯,也是不善心”,这是对世间违犯性和不善心性的共相之说,而这个共相并不适用于饮酒学处,此处有其差别。差别是什么呢?就是:只因为不知事相,即使没有知事之心也可能犯,所以应知为无心,在无心这一点上并无差别。但是,即使在称为“不知事相”的无心这一类里,也只以不善心而吞咽酒类——因此,这个学处在有心和无心两类立场上,都应知为世间违犯且是不善心,这就是此处的差别。因为这里并没有区分说“当有心时”,而是总说“只以不善心”,所以应知在两类立场上,世间违犯性和不善心性都成立。正因如此,《胜义灯》(《小诵注》后五学处解释)中的《小注》学处解释里说:“饮酒学处,从身、从身心二种生起。”在这里,由于没有“知是酒”的心,缺少心支,只是身,所以说为一种生起;而在那一种生起的刹那,所用以饮用的思,唯是决定不善。因此,就在该注中又说:“此中前五学处,因唯以决定不善心生起,杀生等是自性违犯,故应回避;其余是施设违犯。”如此,总说五学处都有不善心性和称为世间违犯的自性违犯性。而在犯缘中,并没有说“知”是犯缘。实际上,注中说:“饮酒学处的犯缘有四:酒等是其中之一、有醉性、欲饮之心现前、依彼而努力、饮入而吞下。”并没有说加上“知是酒”的犯缘而成五种。如果“知是酒”也是犯缘,那就必定会说,但并没有说。如此处一样,在其他经藏等注中,任何地方也都没有说“知”是犯缘。因此,对于“只以不善心而应饮用,故是世间违犯”这一注文,应当决定其义为:即使在无心的这一类里,也是“只以不善心而应饮用,故是世间违犯”。巴利
Apica vuttamevatthaṃ vadantena ‘‘sacittakapakkhe akusaleneva pātabbatāyā’’ti pubbe vuttakkameneva vattabbaṃ sandehādivigamatthattā puna vacanassa. Sikkhāpadavisaye ca visesitabbaṃ visesetvāva vuccati, itarathā āpattānāpattādibhedassa duviññeyyattā. Tathā hi bhikkhunīvibhaṅgaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘vināpi cittena āpajjitabbattā acittakāni, citte pana sati akusaleneva āpajjitabbattā lokavajjāni ceva akusalacittāni cā’’ti giraggasamajjādīnaṃ sacittakapakkhe eva lokavajjatā akusalacittatā ca visesetvā vuttā, na evaṃ surāpānassa. Tassa pana pakkhadvayassāpi sādhāraṇavasena ‘‘akusaleneva pātabbatāyā’’ti vuttaṃ, na pana ‘‘sacittakapakkhe’’ti visesetvā. Tasmā idaṃ surāpānaṃ sacittakācittakapakkhadvayepi lokavajjaṃ akusalacittañcāti dassetumeva ‘‘akusaleneva pātabbatāya lokavajjatā’’ti visuṃ vuttanti suṭṭhu sijjhati. Eteneva yaṃ sāratthadīpaniyaṃ ‘‘sacittakapakkhe akusaleneva pātabbatāya lokavajjatā’’ti vuttassa imasseva adhippāyassa paṭipādakametanti saññāya iminā eva hi adhippāyena aññesupi lokavajjesu acittakasikkhāpadesu akusalacittatā eva vuttā, na pana ticittatā. Teneva bhikkhunīvibhaṅgaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘giraggasamajjaṃ cittāgārasikkhāpadaṃ saṅghāṇi itthālaṅkāro gandhavaṇṇako vāsitakapiññāko bhikkhunīādīhi ummaddanaparimaddanānīti imāni dasa sikkhāpadāni acittakāni akusalacittāni, ayaṃ panettha adhippāyo vināpi cittena āpajjitabbattā acittakāni, citte pana sati akusaleneva āpajjitabbattā lokavajjāni ceva akusalacittāni cā’’ti vuttaṃ, tampi paṭisiddhaṃ hoti tabbiparītasseva atthassa yathāvuttanayena sādhanato. Tasmā surāpānassa acittakapakkhepi cittaṃ akusalamevāti imaṃ visesaṃ dassetumeva idaṃ vacanaṃ vuttanti gahetabbaṃ. Ayañhettha attho vatthuajānanatāya cetthāti ettha ca-kāro visesatthajotako apicāti iminā samānattho. Tasmā yadidaṃ aññesu acittakalokavajjesu vināpi cittena āpajjitabbattā acittakāni, citte pana sati akusaleneva āpajjitabbattā lokavajjāni ceva akusalacittāni cāti lokavajjatāya akusalacittatāya ca lakkhaṇaṃ vuccati, taṃ ettha surāpānasikkhāpade nāgacchati, idha pana viseso atthīti vuttaṃ hoti. So kataroti ce? Vatthuajānanatāya eva vatthujānanacittena vināpi āpajjitabbatāya eva acittakatā veditabbā, natthettha acittakatāya viseso. Kintu vatthuajānanasaṅkhātaacittakapakkhepi akusalacitteneva surāmerayassa ajjhoharitabbatāyāti imassa sikkhāpadassa sacittakapakkhepi acittakapakkhepi lokavajjatā akusalacittatā ca veditabbāti ayamettha viseso. Idha hi ‘‘citte pana satī’’ti avisesetvā ‘‘akusalenevā’’ti sāmaññato vuttattā ubhayapakkhepi lokavajjatā akusalacittatā ca siddhāti veditabbā. Teneva paramatthajotikāya (khu. pā. aṭṭha. 2.pacchimapañcasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) khuddakaṭṭhakathāya sikkhāpadavaṇṇanāya ‘‘surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānaṃ kāyato ca kāyacittato cāti dvisamuṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Surāti jānanacittābhāveneva hettha cittaṅgavirahito kevalopi kāyo ekasamuṭṭhānaṃ vutto, tasmiñca ekasamuṭṭhānakkhaṇepi yāya cetanāya pivati, sā ekantaakusalā eva hoti. Teneva tattheva aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘paṭhamā cettha pañca ekantaakusalacittasamuṭṭhānattā pāṇātipātādīnaṃ pakativajjato veramaṇiyo, sesā paṇṇattivajjato’’ti evaṃ pañcannampi sāmaññato akusalacittatā lokavajjatāsaṅkhātā pakativajjatā ca vuttā. Aṅgesu ca jānanaṅgaṃ na vuttaṃ. Tathā hi ‘‘surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānassa pana surādīnaṃ aññataraṃ hoti madanīyaṃ, pātukāmatācittañca paccupaṭṭhitaṃ hoti, tajjañca vāyāmaṃ āpajjati, pīte ca pavisatīti imāni cattāri aṅgānī’’ti vuttaṃ, na pana surāti jānanaṅgena saddhiṃ pañcāti. Yadi hi surāti jānanampi aṅgaṃ siyā, avassameva taṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, na ca vuttaṃ. Yathā cettha, evaṃ aññāsupi suttapiṭakādiaṭṭhakathāsu katthaci jānanaṅgaṃ na vuttaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘akusaleneva pātabbatāya lokavajjatā’’ti imassa aṭṭhakathāpāṭhassa acittakapakkhepi ‘‘akusaleneva pātabbatāya lokavajjatā’’ti evameva atthoti niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ.
另外,在《难点释》里有这样的说法:“我想杀掉这个有情”,结果却杀死了躺在那个地方的另一个有情,因为存在“有情”这一共同性,所以就像杀生一样成立杀罪;同样,“我想喝这种酒”,结果却喝了另一种酒,因为存在“酒”这一共同性,所以仍然是不善。可是,就像把蛇误认成木头而杀死它时,并不构成杀生一样,把酒误认成椰子汁而喝下时,也不构成不善。这种说法把饮酒和杀生完全等同起来作比喻,是极不合理的。因为一切学处以及杀生等不善法之间,并没有彼此完全相同的固定性质。杀生即使通过间接的方式也能成立,不与取却不是这样;不与取通过命令也能成立,邪淫等却不是这样。所以,这些学处在加行支等方面本来就各不相同,把它们混在一起、完全等同,是不合理的。如果有人辩解说:“就像杀生一样,不与取、邪淫等也能通过间接说法等方式成立”,那么,由于没有那样的经文依据,这种说法怎么能被接受呢?同样,这里也没有“饮酒与杀生相似”的经文依据,所以这种说法也不应该接受。一位通达律藏的人,在驳斥那种仅仅依靠注释书的话才成立的观点时,应当通过经、随顺经等指出它的矛盾,而不应该仅仅因为另一个学处在加行支等方面完全不同,就把它拿来和饮酒学处等同了事。因为对于“即使不知道是酒而喝,也仍然是不善”这一点,并没有与经等相矛盾的地方。在律藏中,至少看不到与这个意思相矛盾的经等;在经藏等中,也看不到。巴利
Apica yaṃ gaṇṭhipadesu ‘‘etaṃ sattaṃ māressāmīti tasmiṃyeva padese nipannaṃ aññaṃ mārentassa pāṇasāmaññassa atthitāya yathā pāṇātipāto hoti, evaṃ etaṃ majjaṃ pivissāmīti aññaṃ majjaṃ pivantassa majjasāmaññassa atthitāya akusalameva hoti, yathā pana kaṭṭhasaññāya sappaṃ ghātentassa pāṇātipāto na hoti, evaṃ nāḷikerapānasaññāya majjaṃ pivantassa akusalaṃ na hotī’’ti pāṇātipātena saddhiṃ sabbathā samānattena upametvā vuttaṃ, taṃ ativiya ayuttaṃ sabbesaṃ sikkhāpadānaṃ pāṇātipātādiakusalānañca aññamaññaṃ samānatāya niyamābhāvā. Pāṇātipāto hi pariyāyenāpi sijjhati, na tathā adinnādānaṃ. Taṃ pana āṇattiyāpi sijjhati, na ca methunādīsu. Tasmā payogaṅgādīhipi bhinnānameva saṃsaṭṭhaṃ sabbathā samīkaraṇaṃ ayuttameva. ‘‘Pāṇātipāto viya adinnādānamethunādīnipi pariyāyakathādīhi sijjhantī’’ti kenaci vutte taṃ kinti na gayhati tathā vacanābhāvāti ce? Idhāpi ‘‘tathā pāṇātipātasadisaṃ surāpāna’’nti vacanābhāvā idampi na gahetabbameva. Kiñci aṭṭhakathāvacaneneva siddhamevatthaṃ paṭibāhantena vinayaññunā suttasuttānulomādīhi tassa virodhaṃ dassetvā paṭibāhetabbaṃ, na pana payogaṅgādīhi accantavibhinnena sikkhāpadantarena saha samīkaraṇamattena. Na hi ‘‘surāti ajānitvā pivantassāpi akusalamevā’’ti ettha suttādivirodho atthi, vinayapiṭake tāva etassa atthassa viruddhaṃ suttādikaṃ na dissati, nāpi suttapiṭakādīsu.
对于这一点,有些人说:“因为经里讲‘诸法以意为前导’,所以一切不善法都只有在事先知道违犯对象的情况下才会发生。”这种说法恰恰表明他们根本不懂这部经的真正用意。因为“诸法以意为前导”这句话,并不是在说“只有事先知道违犯对象,不善法才会生起”,而是在说:善法与不善法生起时,都是依靠那个作为生起因缘而先行生起的俱生心才得以生起,离开心就不可能生起。在这里,当说到“即使不知道是酒而喝了,也仍然是不善”的时候,并不会得出“没有俱生心,贪等不善心所法也能生起”这样的结论。所以,并不需要为了否定那种说法而搬出这部经。这里跟阿毗达摩也没有矛盾,因为阿毗达摩中说,在五门心路过程中,即使事先不知道名称、种类等,善与不善的速行仍然会生起。巴利
Yaṃ panettha keci vadanti ‘‘manopubbaṅgamā dhammāti (dha. pa. 1, 2) vuttattā sabbāni akusalāni pubbe vītikkamavatthuṃ jānantasseva hontī’’ti. Taṃ tesaṃ suttādhippāyānabhiññātameva pakāseti. Na hi ‘‘manopubbaṅgamā dhammā’’ti idaṃ vacanaṃ pubbe vītikkamavatthuṃ jānantasseva akusalā dhammā uppajjantīti imamatthaṃ dīpeti, atha kho kusalākusalā dhammā uppajjamānā uppādapaccayaṭṭhena pubbaṅgamabhūtaṃ sahajātacittaṃ nissāyeva uppajjanti, na vinā cittenāti imamatthaṃ dīpeti. Na hettha ‘‘surāti ajānitvā pivantassa akusalamevā’’ti vutte sahajātacittaṃ vināpi lobhādiakusalacetasikā dhammā uppajjantīti ayamattho āpajjati. Yena taṃ nisedhāya idaṃ suttaṃ āharaṇīyaṃ siyā, abhidhammavirodhopettha natthi pubbe nāmajātiādivasena ajānantasseva pañcaviññāṇavīthiyaṃ kusalākusalajavanuppattivacanato.
而且,愚痴凡夫在六门中生起的速行,绝大多数都是不善的。他们的善速行,则要依靠善友等亲依止缘的力量,才只有极少生起;因为他们即使沉默不语,或者睡着了在做梦,大多数时候也只是掉举等不善速行在活动,所以他们并没有脱离善与不善的速行。不善确实会随顺所缘、随顺习气,按各自的因缘而生起,那么这跟事先知道或不知道又有什么必然关系呢?至于那些具足明知等支分的杀生等行为,以及即使没有明知等支分也能成立的饮酒、邪见等,佛陀都是如实了知它们的各种情况之后才加以制定的;按照佛陀所制定的方式来理解,又怎么会和阿毗达摩相矛盾呢?因此,由于不存在与经教等的矛盾,而且注释书也这样说,所以这里的义理应当按前面所说的那样来理解。如果是这样,那为什么注释书里说“沙弥明知而饮就犯破戒,不知而饮就不犯”呢?这并没有过失,因为破戒取决于佛陀的制禁,就像别住随顺者等人的破戒一样。她们并不是仅仅因为生起不善就构成破戒,因为破戒是在僧团共住甘马之后才制定的。同样,在这里,也只是就明知而饮才制定为破戒,并不是就不知而饮来制定。学处的范畴是一回事,不善的范畴是另一回事。正因如此,沙弥在最初五条学处中只要有一条被破坏,全部学处就都算被破坏。但不善则是哪一条被破坏,就只是那一条,不会牵连其他条。所以,沙弥不知而饮,即使没有破戒,也仍然应当理解为属于业道的不善。巴利
Apica bālaputhujjanānaṃ chasu dvāresu uppajjamānāni javanāni yebhuyyena akusalāneva uppajjanti. Kusalāni pana tesaṃ kalyāṇamittādiupanissayabalena appakāneva uppajjanti, tuṇhībhūtānampi niddāyitvā supinaṃ passantānampi uddhaccādiakusalajavanasseva yebhuyyappavattito kusalākusalavirahitassa javanassa tesaṃ abhāvā. Akusalā hi visayānuguṇaṃ vāsanānuguṇañca yathāpaccayaṃ samuppajjanti, tattha kiṃ pubbe jānanājānananibaddhena. Ye pana jānanādiaṅgasampannā pāṇātipātādayo, ye ca jānanādiṃ vināpi sijjhamānā surāpānamicchādiṭṭhiādayo, te te tathā tathā yāthāvato ñatvā sammāsambuddhena niddiṭṭhā, tesañca yathāniddiṭṭhavasena gahaṇe ko nāma abhidhammavirodho. Evaṃ suttādivirodhābhāvato, aṭṭhakathāya ca vuttattā yathāvuttavasenevettha attho gahetabbo. Yadi evaṃ kasmā ‘‘sāmaṇero jānitvā pivanto sīlabhedaṃ āpajjati, na ajānitvā’’ti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttanti? Nāyaṃ doso sīlabhedassa bhagavato āṇāyattattā ukkhittānuvattikādīnaṃ sīlabhedo viya. Na hi tāsaṃ akusaluppattiyā eva sīlabhedo hoti saṅghāyattasamanubhāsanānantareyeva vihitattā. Evamidhāpi jānitvā pivane eva vihito, na ajānitvā pivane. Añño hi sikkhāpadavisayo, añño akusalavisayo. Teneva sāmaṇerānaṃ purimesu pañcasu sikkhāpadesu ekasmiṃ bhinne sabbānipi sikkhāpadāni bhijjanti. Akusalaṃ pana yaṃ bhinnaṃ, tena ekeneva hoti, nāññehi. Tasmā sāmaṇerassa ajānitvā pivantassa sīlabhedābhāvepi kammapathappattaṃ akusalamevāti gahetabbaṃ.
《要义灯》(Sāratthadīpanī,巴拉基格篇2.42)中说:“沙弥不知道是酒而喝了,不犯巴拉基格,但属于不善。”有些人驳斥这段话,说“那只是他们自己的看法”,并说:“比丘即使不知道,从种子阶段开始饮酒,也犯巴吉帝亚。沙弥知道而喝就破戒,不知道就不破戒——注疏里只说了这么多,并没有说‘但属于不善’。”他在那里给出了理由,但那理由站不住脚。因为注疏在说明沙弥破戒的地方,只说了知道而喝才破戒、不知道就不破戒,并没有说“但属于不善”,这不能成为不知的情况下没有不善的理由,因为那里没有这样的推论,而且在应当说明的地方已经说了“由于必须以不善心饮用,所以为世间所呵责”。而且,那些说“但属于不善”的老师们,并不是只依据这部阐明沙弥破戒的《犍度注疏》的文句才这么说,以至于可以说“注疏里只说了这么多”;他们是依据《饮酒注疏》中的文句、经藏注疏中的文句等多种说法,以及大寺住者们的历代传承才这么说的。认为“只有知道而喝才是不善”这种观点,其实是持邪见的无畏山寺派等的见解。因此,有些人所说的“沙弥不知道是酒而喝了,不犯巴拉基格,但属于不善”,应当接受为善说。巴利
Yaṃ pana sāratthadīpaniyaṃ (sārattha. ṭī. pārājikakaṇḍa 2.42) ‘‘sāmaṇerassa surāti ajānitvā pivantassa pārājikaṃ natthi, akusalaṃ pana hotī’’ti kehici vuttavacanaṃ ‘‘taṃ tesaṃ matimatta’’nti paṭikkhipitvā ‘‘bhikkhuno ajānitvāpi bījato paṭṭhāya majjaṃ pivantassa pācittiyaṃ. Sāmaṇero jānitvā pivanto sīlabhedaṃ āpajjati, na ajānitvāti ettakameva hi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ, akusalaṃ pana hotīti na vutta’’nti tattha kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ akāraṇaṃ. Na hi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ sāmaṇerānaṃ jānitvā pivane eva sīlabhedo, na ajānitvāti sīlabhedakathanaṭṭhāne akusalaṃ pana hotīti avacanaṃ ajānanapakkhe akusalābhāvassa kāraṇaṃ hoti, tattha pasaṅgābhāvā, vattabbaṭṭhāne eva ‘‘akusaleneva pātabbatāya lokavajjatā’’ti vuttattā ca. Na ca te ‘‘akusalaṃ pana hotī’’ti vadantā ācariyā imaṃ sāmaṇerānaṃ sīlabhedappakāsakaṃ khandhakaṭṭhakathāpāṭhameva gahetvā avocuṃ, yena ‘‘ettakameva aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vutta’’nti vattabbaṃ siyā, atha kho surāpānaṭṭhakathāgataṃ suttapiṭakaṭṭhakathāgatañca anekavidhaṃ vacanaṃ, mahāvihāravāsīnaṃ paramparopadesañca gahetvā avocuṃ. Bhinnaladdhikānaṃ abhayagirikādīnaṃ matañhetaṃ, yadidaṃ jānitvā pivantasseva akusalanti gahaṇaṃ. Tasmā yaṃ vuttaṃ kehici ‘‘sāmaṇerassa surāti ajānitvā pivantassa pārājikaṃ natthi, akusalaṃ pana hotī’’ti, taṃ suvuttanti gahetabbaṃ.
《要义灯》(Sāratthadīpanī,巴拉基格篇2.42)中说:“即使不知而饮,入流者的口中也不会进入酒,因为必须以达到业道的不善心才能饮用。”有些人驳斥这段话,说它“不好”,又说:“应当知道,这就像菩萨入胎时菩萨母亲所具的戒一样,是圣弟子们的法性成就。”为了论证这确实是法性成就,又说:“即使在另一生中,圣弟子也不会为了活命而杀生,不会饮酒。如果有人把酒和牛奶混合后放进他口中,只有牛奶进入,酒不进入。就像什么?就像鹳鸟在掺有牛奶的水中,只有牛奶进入,水不进入。如果说这是由种类决定的,那么应当知道,这也是由法性成就的。”他引用了这段注疏文句,但这同样不合理。因为,说“像菩萨母亲的戒一样,是圣弟子们的法性成就”,这里所谓菩萨母亲的法性,是指由于菩萨和自己巴拉密的威力,决定性地不生起不善。同样,圣弟子们在其他生中,由于彻底断除杀生等十恶业道以及其他导致恶趣的不善的圣道之威力,决定性地不生起那些导致犯戒的不善,这才是法性。在这里,法性并不是像说一切有部所说的法性那样是无因的。正如在法性的道理中,当因存在或不存在时,果的存在或不存在是法性,而不是无因无缘的不存在或存在;同样,在这里,由于作为杀生等业道之因的烦恼已彻底断除,所以那些业道不存在;由于其余不善的因还存在,所以它们存在,这是法性,而不是无因性。因此,正是由于没有导致恶趣的贪欲,圣者们即使不知也不会吞咽酒。所以,有些人所说的“即使不知而饮,入流者的口中也不会进入酒,因为必须以达到业道的不善心才能饮用”,这确实是善说。凭什么理由说它“不好”,又怎么能以“这是法性成就”的说法来驳斥它呢?巴利
Yañca sāratthadīpaniyaṃ (sārattha. ṭī. pārājikakaṇḍa 2.42) ‘‘ajānitvā pivantassāpi sotāpannassa mukhaṃ surā na pavisati kammapathappattaakusalacitteneva pātabbato’’ti kehici vuttavacanaṃ ‘‘na sundara’’nti paṭikkhipitvā ‘‘bodhisatte kucchigate bodhisattamātu sīlaṃ viya hi idampi ariyasāvakānaṃ dhammatāsiddhanti veditabba’’nti vatvā dhammatāsiddhattaṃyeva samatthetuṃ ‘‘bhavantarepi hi ariyasāvako jīvitahetupi neva pāṇaṃ hanati, na suraṃ pivati. Sace pissa surañca khīrañca missetvā mukhe pakkhipanti, khīrameva pavisati, na surā. Yathā kiṃ? Yathā koñcasakuṇānaṃ khīramissake udake khīrameva pavisati, na udakaṃ. Idaṃ yonisiddhanti ce, idampi dhammatāsiddhanti veditabba’’nti idaṃ aṭṭhakathāvacanaṃ dassitaṃ, tampi na yuttameva. Yathā hi bodhisattamātu sīlaṃ viya ariyasāvakānaṃ dhammatāsiddhanti ettha bodhisattamātu dhammatā nāma bodhisattassa ca attano ca pāramitānubhāvena akusalānuppattiniyamo eva. Tathā ariyasāvakānampi bhavantare pāṇātipātādīnaṃ dasannaṃ kammapathānaṃ aññesañca apāyahetukānaṃ akusalānaṃ accantappahāyakassa maggassa ānubhāvena taṃtaṃsīlavītikkamahetukassa akusalassa anuppattiniyamo eva dhammatā. Na hi sabhāvavādīnaṃ dhammatā viya ahetukatā idha dhammatā nāma. Yathā vā evaṃdhammatānaye kāraṇassa bhāve abhāve ca kāriyassa bhāvo abhāvo ca dhammatā, na ahetuappaccayābhāvābhāvo, evamidhāpi pāṇātipātādikammapathānaṃ hetubhūtassa kilesassa accantābhāvena tesaṃ abhāvo, tadavasesānaṃ akusalānaṃ hetuno bhāvena bhāvo ca dhammatā , na ahetukatā. Tasmā apāyahetuno rāgassa abhāveneva ariyānaṃ ajānitvāpi surāya anajjhoharaṇanti suvuttamevidaṃ kehici ‘‘ajānitvā pivantassāpi sotāpannassa mukhaṃ surā na pavisati kammapathappattaakusalacitteneva pātabbato’’ti, taṃ kena hetunā na sundaraṃ jātanti na ñāyati, dhammatāsiddhanti vā kathanena kathaṃ taṃ paṭikkhittanti.
《长部注疏》(dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.352)里说“把酒和牛奶混在一起……这是法性所成”,这句话同样证明了:即使在饮酒时没有起心动念的情况下,也仍然是不善心。因为注疏中这样说:“圣弟子即使转生到别的世界,也不会为了活命而杀生,不会拿别人没给的东西……不会喝酒。”有人可能会质疑:“前四种业道是有心的,远离它们还容易做到;但最后这个饮酒是无心的,怎么能远离呢?”注疏者考虑到这种质疑可能出现,于是说明:虽然因为不知道情况而属于无心,但酒必须由达到业道程度的不善心才能咽下去,而圣弟子那种不善的运作已经被圣道彻底断除了,所以酒不会进入他的喉咙。为了表达这个意思,注疏者说了“如果把酒和牛奶混在一起……”这段话。其中“只有牛奶进去,酒不进去”这句,是为了说明酒在任何情况下都不会进入喉咙,而不是为了说明混了酒的牛奶有把酒分离出去的能力。这里的要点是:如果混了酒的牛奶有什么东西会进去,那也只是牛奶进去,不是酒进去;而当牛奶中的酒没有分离时,就什么也不会进去。说“这是由种类决定的”,意思是就像水不会进入(鹳鸟的)嘴里一样,这也是由种类决定的。这里的“种类”指的是出生类别。因此,意思是:对于鹳鸟这一类众生来说,以嘴尖为代表的色法,由于不存在吞咽混奶之水的原因,所以水不会进去,这是成立的。这一点也是在说:即使混了酒的牛奶中的酒进到牛奶里,也不会进入喉咙。说“由法性所成”,是指由圣弟子的非色法所具有的法性所成——也就是他们不具备能作为饮酒之因的烦恼。应当知道,这样一来,即使在无心的前提下,酒也必须由不善心才能喝,所以圣弟子不会饮酒,这一点就得到了证明。如果有人说:在不知道的情况下,即使没有不善心也可能喝,那么圣者不饮酒就是由法性来证明的——这种说法不对,因为它和注疏中其他文句相矛盾。应当像不与其他文句相矛盾那样来理解这里的含义。巴利
Yampi dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.352) ‘‘surañca khīrañca missetvā…pe… idaṃ dhammatāsiddha’’nti vacanaṃ, tampi surāpānassa acittakapakkhepi akusalacittaññeva sādheti. Tathā hi ‘‘bhavantarepi hi ariyasāvako jīvitahetupi pāṇaṃ na hanati, nādinnaṃ ādiyati…pe… na suraṃ pivatī’’ti vutte ‘‘purimānaṃ tāva catunnaṃ kammapathānaṃ sacittakattā viramaṇaṃ sukaraṃ, pacchimassa pana surāpānassa acittakattā kathaṃ viramaṇaṃ bhaveyyā’’ti codanāsambhavaṃ manasikatvā vatthuajānanavasena acittakattepi yasmā kammapathappattaakusaleneva surā ajjhoharitabbā, tādisī ca akusalappavatti ariyasāvakassa maggeneva hatā, tasmāssa paragalaṃ surāya pavisanaṃ natthīti atthato gamyamānatthaṃ parihāravacanaṃ vadatā ‘‘sace pissa surañca khīrañcā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha khīrameva pavisati, na surāti idaṃ surāya sabbathāpi paragalappavesābhāvadassanaparaṃ, na pana surāmissakhīrassa surāya viyojanasāmatthiyadassanaparaṃ. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – yadi hi surāmisse khīre kiñci paviseyya, khīrameva paviseyya, na surā. Khīre pana surāya aviyutte na kiñci pavisatīti . Idaṃ yonisiddhanti udakassa mukhe appavisanaṃ yonisiddhaṃ. Yonīti cettha jāti adhippetā. Tasmā koñcajātikānaṃ mukhatuṇḍasaṅkhātānaṃ rūpadhammānaṃ khīramissaudakajjhoharaṇahetuttābhāvena taṃ appavisanaṃ siddhanti attho. Idampi hi khīramissāya surāya khīre pavisantepi paragalāpavisananti. Dhammatāsiddhanti ariyasāvakassa arūpadhammānaṃ surāpivanahetubhūtakilesasahitattābhāvasaṅkhātāya dhammatāya siddhaṃ. Evamettha acittakapakkhepi surāya akusalacitteneva pātabbato ariyasāvakānaṃ apivanaṃ samatthitanti veditabbaṃ. Athāpi siyā ajānanapakkhe akusalacittena vināva pātabbattepi surāya apivanaṃ ariyānaṃ dhammatāti samatthanaparametanti, taṃ na, aṭṭhakathāvacanantarehi virujjhanato. Yathā hi vacanantarehi na virujjhati, tathāyeva attho gahetabbo.
不过,即使是在来世,圣者不造作杀生等五种业道,这本来就是圣者的法性戒;而且对他们来说,即使是有心所作也是如此。就像饮酒一样,其余四种业道即使在不清楚的情况下,圣弟子也不会去造作。然而,对于不清楚的圣者,即使以善心或无记心,在远离杀生、拿取他人财物等事情上,身业和语业的活动也不会生起;如果不会生起,那么眼护长老经行时导致有情丧命,以及莲华色长老尼被强行以道触道等事也就不可能发生。因此,由于饮酒即使在无心的情况下也必定是不善,酒不会进入圣者的喉咙,应当知道这是为了特别区分而说的。巴利
Apica pāṇātipātādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ kammapathānaṃ bhavantarepi akaraṇaṃ ariyānaṃ dhammatāsīlameva, tesañca yadi sacittakataṃ samānaṃ. Surāpānaṃ viya itarānipi cattāri ajānantenāpi ariyasāvakena na kattabbāni siyuṃ, tathā ca ajānantānaṃ ariyānaṃ kusalābyākatacittehipi viramaṇaparamāraṇaparasantakagahaṇādīsu kāyavacīpavatti na sampajjeyya, no ce sampajjati, cakkhupālattherassa caṅkamanena pāṇaviyogassa, uppalavaṇṇattheriyā balakkārena maggenamaggaphusanassa ca pavattattā. Tasmā surāpānassa acittakapakkhepi akusaleneva pātabbatāya surā ariyānaṃ paragalaṃ na pavisatīti visesetvā vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
难道不是只有在了知对象时才说一切业道成立吗?不是这样,因为邪见正是靠颠倒执取才生起的。一个不是遍知者的人,把不是遍知者执为遍知者,把无常等执为常等,这样的邪见怎么可能了知对象呢?如果它真的了知,那邪见本身就不会存在了。而邪见也被算在诸业道之中,所以“只有了知对象,业道才生起”这个规则怎么能成立呢?再说,当人执取“这个不是遍知者就是遍知者”时,由于他执取了“这个是有情”的自相,难道邪见也了知了对象吗?不是的,因为喝酒时执取“这不是酒”的自相,情况也是一样的。如果说,口称“这个”时虽然触及了对象,但因为没有了知“酒”这个特相,所以不算了知——那么,即使了知“这个”是个人,由于没有了知“不是遍知者”这个特相,邪见也同样不了知对象,道理是一样的。因为对他们来说,“佛陀”就意味着“有害者”,所以对佛陀生起嗔心;或者把有害的布拉纳·咖萨巴等执为有益者而对之生起贪心——其中道理也是同样的。一切不善法,都是以颠倒为前提的。巴利
Nanu vatthuṃ jānantasseva sabbe kammapathā vuttāti? Na, micchādiṭṭhiyā viparītaggahaṇeneva pavattattā. Kathañhi nāma asabbaññuṃ sabbaññuto, aniccādiṃ niccādito ca gahaṇantī diṭṭhi vatthuṃ vijānāti. Yadi hi jāneyya, micchādiṭṭhiyeva na siyā. Sā ca kammapathesu gaṇitāti kuto jānantasseva kammapathappavattiniyamo. Atha sabbaññuṃ sabbaññūti gaṇhantīpi ‘‘ayaṃ satto’’ti tassa sarūpaggahaṇato diṭṭhipi vatthuṃ vijānātīti ce? Na, surāpānassapi ‘‘ayaṃ na surā’’ti sarūpaggahaṇassa samānattā. ‘‘Aya’’nti ca vatthuparāmasanepi ‘‘surā’’ti visesavijānanābhāvā na jānātīti ce? ‘‘Aya’’nti puggalattaṃ jānantīpi ‘‘asabbaññū’’tipi visesajānanābhāvā diṭṭhipi vatthuṃ na jānātīti samānameva. Evañhi tesaṃ buddhāti ahitoti ahitaṃ vā pūraṇakassapādiṃ hito paṭighassa vā anunayassa vā uppādanepi eseva nayo. Vipallāsapubbakañhi sabbaṃ akusalaṃ.
而且,酒在被喝的时候,必定会生起不善,这是它的本性,就像毒药一样。把酒当成牛奶等来喝的人,即使对母亲、姐妹等人,也会随着对象本身而生起贪、嗔等不善的持续缠缚;同样,在喝的那一刻,猛利的贪也会生起。正因为如此,萨伽陀长老在不知情而喝的时候,退失了五神通和禅那,之后对佛等生起不恭敬等不善的持续缠缚,一直到酒力消退才停止。也正因为如此,世尊为了显示这种不恭敬等不善的现行,揭示了饮酒的过患,并制定了学处。因为如果没有五盖的生起,就不会有禅那的退失。所以,即使是不知情的人,酒在被喝的时候,也依其自性成为不善生起的原因——这个道理,从萨伽陀长老退失禅那的关联中也能成立;从圣者没有烦恼的角度来说,酒被称为“不能入口”这一点也能成立。因此,在这里应当得出结论:这样的理解才是随顺分别论者之宗的。巴利
Apica surāya pīyamānāya niyamena akusaluppādanaṃ sabhāvo pītāya viya. Khīrādisaññāya pītasurassa puggalassa mātubhaginiādīsupi rāgadosādiakusalappabandho vatthusabhāveneva uppajjati, evaṃ pīyamānakkhaṇepi tikhiṇo rāgo uppajjateva, teneva sāgatattherassa ajānitvā pivanakāle pañcābhiññādijhānaparihāni, pacchā ca buddhādīsu agāravādiakusalappabandho yāva surāvigamā pavattittha. Teneva bhagavāpi tassa agāravādiakausalappavattidassanamukhena surādosaṃ pakāsetvā sikkhāpadaṃ paññapesi. Na hi pañcanīvaraṇuppattiṃ vinā jhānaparihāni hoti. Tasmā ajānantassāpi surā pīyamānā pītā ca attano sabhāveneva akusaluppādikāti ayamattho sāgatattherassa jhānaparihāniyā anvayatopi, ariyānaṃ kilesābhāvena mukhena surāya appavesasaṅkhātabyatirekatopi sijjhatīti niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ, evaṃ gahaṇameva hi vibhajjavādīmatānusāraṃ.
至于“只有知道自己在喝才算不善”这种主张,那只是分裂派的无畏山派等一派自己的看法。可是,注书作者等人并不了解这一点,把它当成“他宗之说”,凭自己的理解拼凑着写下来,甚至混进了分别论者的阵营里,直到今天还在败坏教法。据说从前在这个达米罗国,有一个名叫那先的分裂派长老,为了展示破斥他宗的方法,用达米罗诗体写诗,就像昆达拉凯西的故事那样,向诗人传授了许多颠倒义理的道理,比如:“饮酒这件事,只有知道而喝才是不善;此外,依处所、时间等差别而有无穷无尽的所知,一切智智不能仅凭自相了知,因为所知无穷无尽,而智慧是有限的。只能依无常等共相来了知。”又说:“就像胜义法分为名色等那样,施设的有情等也是各自不同的所缘分类。”他用这些似是而非的理由让诗人心里迷惑,然后让他把诗写出来。依靠这些诗,这种分裂派的见解就混入了分别论者的宗义中,长久流传。后来,阿阇梨佛音大长老破除了这外在的邪见之网,在这里建立了清净的教法,才把它清理掉;在《显扬心要》律注中,依据“饮酒者若存心而饮,其心即是不善”这一决定性的说法,一些心念颠倒的人又让它抬头了。大长老们对此加以裁决,以可呵责之议予以粉碎,并把执持此见的比丘摈除出去,依正法、依律、依导师的教法,过了很久才得以平息。正因为这样,我们在这里才如此详细地加以驳斥,以免这种见解再去败坏其他分别论者。所以,这里所说的和未说的理由都应当好好审察,在不违背经论的前提下,正确地把握其义。巴利
Yaṃ pana ‘‘jānitvā pivantasseva akusala’’nti gahaṇaṃ, taṃ bhinnaladdhikānaṃ abhayagirikādīnameva mataṃ, taṃ pana gaṇṭhipadakārakādīhi ‘‘paravādo’’ti ajānantehi attano matiyā saṃsanditvā likhitaṃ vibhajjavādīmaṇḍalampi pavisitvā yāvajjatanā sāsanaṃ dūseti, purāpi kira imasmimpi damiḷaraṭṭhe koci bhinnaladdhiko nāgaseno nāma thero kuṇḍalakesīvatthuṃ paravādamathananayadassanatthaṃ damiḷakabbarūpena kārento ‘‘imaṃ surāpānassa jānitvāva pivane akusalanayaṃ, aññañca desakālādibhedena anantampi ñeyyaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ salakkhaṇavaseneva ñātuṃ na sakkoti ñāṇena paricchinnattena ñeyyassa anantattahānippasaṅgato. Aniccādisāmaññalakkhaṇavaseneva pana ñātuṃ sakkotī’’ti ca, ‘‘paramatthadhammesu nāmarūpantiādibhedo viya puggalādisammutipi visuṃ vatthubhedo evā’’ti ca evamādikaṃ bahuṃ viparītatthanayaṃ kabbākārassa kavino upadisitvā tasmiṃ pabandhe kāraṇābhāsehi satiṃ sammohetvā pabandhāpesi, tañca kabbaṃ nissāya imaṃ bhinnaladdhikamataṃ idha vibhajjavādīmate sammissaṃ ciraṃ pavattittha. Taṃ pana pacchā ācariyabuddhappiyamahātherena bāhirabbharikaṃ diṭṭhijālaṃ vighāṭetvā idha parisuddhaṃ sāsanaṃ patiṭṭhāpentena sodhitampi sāratthadīpaniyā (sārattha. ṭī. pārājikakaṇḍa 2.42) vinayaṭīkāya surāpānassa sacittakapakkheyeva cittaṃ akusalanti samatthanavacanaṃ nissāya kehici vipallattacittehi puna ukkhittasiraṃ jātaṃ, tañca mahātherehi vinicchinitvā gārayhavādaṃ katvā madditvā laddhigāhake ca bhikkhū viyojetvā dhammena vinayena satthusāsanena cireneva vūpasamitaṃ. Tenevettha mayaṃ evaṃ vitthārato idaṃ paṭikkhipimha ‘‘mā aññepi vibhajjavādino ayaṃ laddhi dūsesī’’ti. Tasmā idha vuttāni avuttāni ca kāraṇāni suṭṭhu sallakkhetvā yathā āgamavirodho na hoti, tathā attho gahetabbo.
其余是指:对于以事相了知之心识知的范畴来说,即使在有心方面,也没有心一定是不善这个定则,这就是其余一切的意思。阻止是指:用对畜生女没有过失等说法,挡住以无犯为借口的取巧。关门是指:用而且那是对女人等说法,关上作为借口取巧之因的门。截断水流是指:借着这两种借口取巧的门路,截断持续不断的违犯之流。使更加坚固是指:用上面所说的理由,把依最初制定而成立的罪本身加固,不给无犯留余地。而这种随制,因为在没有违犯时、在非行境而微不足道的违犯时,即使对世间共许的罪也作宽松处理,所以会生起;因此,为了说明它这样生起及其生起之因,就说了除了增上慢等话。除了增上慢是说明这条随制的无违犯之因。除了梦中是说明这条随制的微不足道之因。其中,无违犯是指:由于恶欲者把并不存在的上人法宣说为存在,这种以欺骗意图为本质的违犯不存在。因为增上慢者把未证得的误以为已证得,所以没有上面所说的违犯。微不足道是指:依据诸比丘,这个思是存在的,但它是微不足道的这句话,虽然有解脱乐之思和加行存在,但由于被昏沉睡眠压倒、无力,所以微不足道,也就是没有构成罪的说法。这里的vā应理解为集合义,或者读作abbohārikattā cā以及微不足道。已说是指:这两种随制都作为无犯而说,这是其意旨。巴利
Sesanti yassa vatthuvijānanacittena sacittakapakkhepi cittaṃ akusalamevāti niyamo natthi, taṃ sabbanti attho. Rundhantīti ‘‘tiracchānagatitthiyā doso natthī’’tiādinā anāpattiyā lesaggahaṇaṃ nivārentī. Dvāraṃ pidahantīti ‘‘tañca kho manussitthiyā’’tiādinā (pārā. 41) lesaggahaṇassa kāraṇasaṅkhātaṃ dvāraṃ pidahantī. Sotaṃ pacchindamānāti tadubhayalesaggahaṇadvārānaṃ vasena avicchinnaṃ vītikkamasotaṃ pacchindamānā. Gāḷhataraṃ karontīti yathāvuttehi kāraṇehi paṭhamapaññattisiddhaṃ āpattiññeva daḷhaṃ karontī, anāpattiyā okāsaṃ adadamānāti attho. Sā ca yasmā vītikkamābhāve, avisayatāya abbohārike vītikkame ca lokavajjepi sithilaṃ karontī uppajjati, tasmā tathā uppattiṃ uppattikāraṇañca dassento āha aññatra adhimānātiādi. Aññatra adhimānāti imissā anupaññattiyā ‘‘vītikkamābhāvā’’ti kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Aññatra supinantāti imissā ‘‘abbohārikattā’’ti kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha vītikkamābhāvāti pāpicchāya avijjamānassa uttarimanussadhammassa vijjamānato pakāsanavasappavattavisaṃvādanādhippāyasaṅkhātassa vītikkamassa abhāvato. Adhimānikassa hi anadhigate adhigatasaññitāya yathāvuttavītikkamo natthi. Abbohārikattāti ‘‘atthesā, bhikkhave, cetanā, sā ca kho abbohārikā’’ti (pārā. 235) vacanato mocanassādacetanāya upakkamanassa ca vijjamānattepi thinamiddhena abhibhūtatāya avasattena abbohārikattā, āpattikāraṇavohārābhāvāti attho. Vā-saddo cettha samuccayattho daṭṭhabbo, ‘‘abbohārikattā cā’’ti vā pāṭho. Vuttāti duvidhāpi cesā anupaññatti anāpattikarā vuttāti adhippāyo.
在未违犯时:即使遇到灾难,比丘们也没有违犯学处,就像“因为追悔而没有吃”等事例中那样,比丘们并没有违犯,而是报告了自己的痛苦生起,这就是这里的意思。使松弛:先解除一般性地制定的学处,然后在自己所涉的范围内,以不构成犯戒的方式使它松弛。给予门:给予不犯戒的门。一次又一次地做不犯戒:通过所给予的那扇门,显示一层又一层的不犯戒状态。然而,即使在已经制定的学处上,伍达义以“对短暂的妓女没有过错”为借口而违犯,并在做媒人的犯戒事例中制定了学处,所以说“在已作违犯时”。关于制定方式:从义理上说,就是指根本制定,这是其意旨。巴利
Akate vītikkameti āpadāsupi bhikkhūhi sikkhāpadavītikkame akate, kukkuccā na bhuñjiṃsūtiādīsu viya vītikkamaṃ akatvā bhikkhūhi attano dukkhuppattiyā ārocitāyāti attho. Sithilaṃ karontīti paṭhamaṃ sāmaññato baddhasikkhāpadaṃ mocetvā attano visaye anāpattikaraṇavasena sithilaṃ karontī. Dvāraṃ dadamānāti anāpattiyā dvāraṃ dadamānā. Aparāparampi anāpattiṃ kurumānāti dinnena tena dvārena uparūpari anāpattibhāvaṃ dīpentī. Paññattepi sikkhāpade udāyinā ‘‘muhuttikāya vesiyā na doso’’ti lesena vītikkamitvā sañcarittāpajjanavatthusmiṃ (pārā. 296 ādayo) paññattattā ‘‘kate vītikkame’’ti vuttaṃ. Paññattigatikāti atthato mūlapaññattiyevāti adhippāyo.
诵分:毡布篇巴利
Santhatabhāṇavāro
跋耆子比丘事论的注释巴利
Vajjiputtakavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
43-44 43-44. 在关于瓦吉之子比丘这件事的巴利文里,“毗舍离人……行淫欲法”这里,应当理解为:他们去了亲戚家,取了在家人的样子,心里想着“我们是在家人”,于是行了淫欲法,所以说“也遭到亲戚的灾祸”等等。亲戚的毁灭是由王罚等原因造成的,所以说“王罚等”。谷物、金银、奴婢、牛马等财物叫做“财富”,这些的毁灭也是由王罚等造成的,所以说“这个道理在第二句上也适用”。从“不是一切知佛”等话可以看出,他们对三件事没有净信,于教法中无能,为了表明自己有能,而说“不是我们”等话,应当如此理解。在“三十八所缘”这句巴利文里,是排除未来(所缘)的光明、虚空、遍处而说的,若与那些合起来则有四十。分别善法,是指“在这个所缘上,这个生起”这样分别显示的、有近行禅的大上善法。在家障碍,是指因共忧等而忙于在家事务。住所障碍,是指因对新旧房舍作修缮等而恒时忙碌。以这两种难以舍弃的障碍来说,一切障碍都已完全包括在内,应当如此理解。巴利
43-44. Vajjiputtakavatthukathāya pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘vesālikā…pe… methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭiseviṃsū’’ti ettha te ñātikulaṃ gantvā gihiliṅgaṃ gahetvā ‘‘gihibhūtā maya’’nti saññāya methunaṃ paṭiseviṃsūti gahetabbaṃ, tenāha ñātibyasanenapi phuṭṭhātiādi. Ñātīnaṃ vināso rājadaṇḍādikāraṇena hotīti āha rājadaṇḍaiccādi. Dhaññahiraññadāsidāsagomahiṃsādidhanāni bhogā nāma, tesampi rājadaṇḍādināva vināsoti āha ‘‘esa nayo dutiyapadepī’’ti. Na sabbaññubuddhotiādinā tīsu vatthūsu appasannāva sāsane abhabbāti saññāya attano bhabbataṃ pakāsentā na mayantiādimāhaṃsūti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Aṭṭhatiṃsārammaṇesū’’ti pāḷiyaṃ anāgate ālokākāsakasiṇe vajjetvā vuttaṃ, tehi pana saddhiṃ cattālīsa honti. Vibhattā kusalā dhammāti ‘‘imasmiṃ ārammaṇe idaṃ hotī’’ti vibhāgaso dassitā saupacārajjhānā mahaggatakusalā dhammā. Gihipalibodhanti sahasokitādivasena gihīsu byāvaṭataṃ. Āvāsapalibodhanti senāsanesu navakammādivasena niccabyāvaṭataṃ. Duppariccāgānaṃ imesaṃ dvinnaṃ palibodhānaṃ vasena sabbepi palibodhā saṅgahitā evāti veditabbaṃ.
“Yena”是指原因。“不共住”这句话的意思是:他在那一生中,不管以什么方式成了比丘,都不该和比丘们共住,就是针对这个意思才说的,所以说“不共住”。所谓“可废除已制”,是因为没有说“他来了不该让他出家”,而只说到“不该给他授达上”这个程度,由此可知犯巴拉基格者的沙弥身份是被允许的,所以说“然而住于沙弥地位”等。因为经文说“若比丘”,而舍戒者既然不是比丘,行淫欲时也就不犯巴拉基格,因此,允许他“来了应授达上”的达上,并不等于废除巴拉基格,所以说“住于比丘性而戒无缺故”。“最上义”指阿拉汉果,或者就是涅槃。巴利
Yenāti kāraṇena. Asaṃvāsoti idaṃ tasmiṃ attabhāve kenacipi pariyāyena bhikkhu hutvā bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ saṃvāsaṃ nārahatīti imamatthaṃ sandhāya vuttanti āha ‘‘asaṃvāso’’ti. Paññattaṃ samūhaneyyāti ‘‘so āgato na pabbājetabbo’’ti avatvā ‘‘na upasampādetabbo’’ti ettakasseva vuttattā pārājikassa sāmaṇerabhūmi anuññātāti viññāyati, tenāha sāmaṇerabhūmiyaṃ pana ṭhitotiādi. ‘‘Yo pana bhikkhū’’ti vuttattā (pārā. 39) paccakkhātasikkho yasmā bhikkhu na hoti, methunasevane ca pārājikaṃ nāpajjati, tasmāssa ‘‘āgato upasampādetabbo’’ti upasampadaṃ anujānanto pārājikaṃ na samūhanati nāma, tenāha ‘‘bhikkhubhāve ṭhatvā avipannasīlatāyā’’ti. Uttamatthaṃ arahattaṃ, nibbānameva vā.
四种律等论说的注释巴利
Catubbidhavinayādikathāvaṇṇanā
45 “取出”就是从圣典里抽出来。比如从“优波离,具足五法的比丘不应被追问。哪五种?不知经,不知随顺经……”这类圣典文句里,他们把经和随顺经取了出来。从“我们师长是这样受持、这样追问的,所以无犯”这类文句里,取出了师说。从“具寿优波离这样说:‘贤友,梦中漏泄无犯’”这类文句里,取出了自己的见解。而那位长老的己见因为已经被经所涵盖,所以就成了经。同样,其他的也应知道是被经等所涵盖的才应采纳,没有被涵盖的不应采纳。或者,“取出”就是分别,把有义注的整个律藏放入经等四处的范畴中,分成四类而阐明律,因为离开这些就没有别的,这是其意趣。“所说”指那先长老在《弥兰陀问经》中所说。从咽喉等字母生起处等所引出的、以自己语表而说的言语,是“句”。所谓“味”就是精华,如“叶味”等说法中那样,这里指被遮止与开许的经的精华,这是意思;或者说“味”是相,因为不抽出具体事相而随顺相而说。由法结集者等师承所带来的义注,就是“师承”,所以他说“师承就是师说”。巴利
45.Nīharitvāti pāḷito uddharitvā, tathā hi ‘‘pañcahupāli, aṅgehi samannāgatena bhikkhunā nānuyuñjitabbaṃ. Katamehi pañcahi? Suttaṃ na jānāti, suttānulomaṃ na jānātī’’tiādipāḷito suttaṃ suttānulomañca nīhariṃsu. ‘‘Anāpatti evaṃ amhākaṃ ācariyānaṃ uggaho paripucchāti bhaṇatī’’ti evamādito ācariyavādaṃ. ‘‘Āyasmā upāli evamāha – ‘anāpatti, āvuso, supinantenā’ti’’ evamādito attano matiṃ nīhariṃsu, sā ca therassa attanomati suttena saṅgahitattā suttaṃ jātaṃ, evamaññāpi suttādīhi saṅgahitāva gahetabbā, netarāti veditabbaṃ. Atha vā nīharitvāti vibhajitvā sāṭṭhakathaṃ sakalaṃ vinayapiṭakaṃ suttādīsu catūsu padesesu pakkhipitvā catudhā vibhajitvā vinayaṃ pakāsesuṃ tabbinimuttassa abhāvāti adhippāyo. Vuttanti nāgasenattherena milindapañhe vuttaṃ. Kaṇṭhādivaṇṇuppattiṭṭhānakaraṇādīhi āharitvā attano vacīviññattiyāva bhāsitavacanaṃ āhaccapadaṃ. Rasoti sāro ‘‘pattaraso’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 628-630) viya, paṭikkhittaanuññātasuttasāroti attho, rasoti vā lakkhaṇaṃ paṭivatthukaṃ anuddharitvā lakkhaṇānulomena vuttattā. Dhammasaṅgāhakādiācariyavaṃsena ābhatā aṭṭhakathā ācariyavaṃsoti āha ‘‘ācariyavaṃsoti ācariyavādo’’ti.
“律藏中的巴利圣典”在这里是就主体内容而说的。在其余诸藏中,也同样可以按照经等四种方式随其相应而得到。“大处”是指大范围、大领域,从含义上说,就是依据“诸比丘,凡我……”等巴利文句的方式,从不许可的随顺和许可的随顺两方面,由人们以理趣如此这般地执取而来的义理。因为这些义理,即使世尊没有以具体形式宣说,但由于它们对于所遮止的随顺、所开许的随顺以及其他应作之事,是遮止或生起的因,所以成为大行境,因此被称为“大处”;而不是指“诸比丘,凡我所不许可……”等带有意图的巴利圣典本身,因为那已经归入经中了。因为已经说过:“随顺经也应导入经中……经本身更具力。”因为那带有意图的巴利圣典不应导入经中,也不应被采纳,否则它就成了随顺经。因此,依据这部巴利圣典的意图,由人们所执取的如前所述的义理,就是随顺经。而由于这部巴利圣典能够说明它,所以也应被理解为随顺经,因此说“世尊如此说”等。因为依据“诸比丘,凡我……”等巴利圣典的理趣,由人们应当执取的不许可的随顺等义理,就是“大处”。巴利
Vinayapiṭake pāḷīti idha adhikāravasena vuttaṃ. Sesapiṭakesupi suttādicatunayā yathānurūpaṃ labbhanteva. Mahāpadesāti mahāokāsā mahāvisayā, te atthato ‘‘yaṃ, bhikkhave’’tiādipāḷivasena akappiyānulomato kappiyānulomato ca puggalehi nayato tathā tathā gayhamānā atthanayā eva. Te hi bhagavatā sarūpato avuttesupi paṭikkhittānulomesu, anuññātānulomesu ca sesesu kiccesu nivattipavattihetutāya mahāgocarāti ‘‘mahāpadesā’’ti vuttā, na pana ‘‘yaṃ, bhikkhave, mayā idaṃ na kappatī’’tiādinā vuttā sādhippāyā pāḷiyeva tassā sutte paviṭṭhattā. ‘‘Suttānulomampi sutte otāretabbaṃ…pe… suttameva balavatara’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.45) hi vuttaṃ, na hesā sādhippāyā pāḷi sutte otāretabbā, na gahetabbā vā hoti, yenāyaṃ suttānulomaṃ siyā. Tasmā imaṃ pāḷiadhippāyaṃ nissāya puggalehi gahitā yathāvuttaatthāva suttānulomaṃ. Tappakāsakattā pana ayaṃ pāḷipi suttānulomanti gahetabbaṃ, tenāha ye bhagavatā evaṃ vuttātiādi. Yaṃ bhikkhavetiādipāḷinayena hi puggalehi gahetabbā ye akappiyānulomādayo atthā vuttā, te mahāpadesāti attho.
义注既是世尊散说教法的产物,也是随顺经的产物。因为它是结集法的长老们依照圣典注释的次序结集而说的,所以被称为“师说”;由此应当知道,义注在义理上被归入经和随顺经之中。义注如此,自己的见解也同样具有权威性。因为如果不依靠世尊的言教和随顺言教,即使是最上首弟子等人,也不能凭自己的智慧之力,在经、论、律中宣说任何关于世俗谛和胜义谛分别的义理,因此一切言教都被归入经和随顺经之中。不过,由于义注等被单独结集,所以把其余部分依经和随顺经来把握,律就被开示为四种。自己的见解虽然也是依经等而生起的,但因为它们在经等中没有以具体形式出现,所以说“除了经、随顺经、师说之外”,因此说“以随觉的理趣把握”。这里的意思是:唯以随顺经等的觉慧,以及由此获得的理趣来把握。巴利
Bhagavato pakiṇṇakadesanābhūtā ca suttānulomabhūtā ca aṭṭhakathā. Yasmā dhammasaṅgāhakattherehi pāḷivaṇṇanākkamena saṅgahetvā vuttā, tasmā ‘‘ācariyavādo’’ti vuttā, etena ca aṭṭhakathā suttasuttānulomesu atthato saṅgayhatīti veditabbā. Yathā ca esā, evaṃ attanomatipi pamāṇabhūtā. Na hi bhagavato vacanaṃ vacanānulomañca anissāya aggasāvakādayopi attano ñāṇabalena suttābhidhammavinayesu kañci sammutiparamatthabhedaṃ atthaṃ vattuṃ sakkonti, tasmā sabbampi vacanaṃ sutte suttānulome ca saṅgayhati. Visuṃ pana aṭṭhakathādīnaṃ saṅgahitattā tadavasesaṃ suttasuttānulomato gahetvā catudhā vinayo niddiṭṭho. Suttādayo nissāyeva pavattāpi attanomati tesu sarūpena anāgatattā vuttaṃ ‘‘suttasuttānulomaācariyavāde muñcitvā’’ti, tenāha ‘‘anubuddhiyā nayaggāhenā’’ti. Tattha suttādīni anugatāya eva buddhiyā tehi laddhanayaggāhena cāti attho.
“上座部之见”是指玛哈苏玛长老等人的主张。即使只是依止于经等,因颠倒执取也会生起自己的见解,所以说了“然而那……”等话。“以义”是指以自己依理趣所把握的义。“圣典”是指作为自己见解之依据的、带有义注的圣典。“以圣典”是指为了遮破它,由他人引来的带有义注的圣典,也就是把自己所把握的义和圣典对照起来。“在师说中”是指在由自己与他人所引出的义注中。“导入且一致”是指与自己引出的内容相对照而导入,并与他人引出的内容一致。“一切皆弱”是因为并非一切知者,由于烦恼习气的缘故,不能如实通达义理,所以才这样说。由于文本有疏忽,师说也可能与随顺经不一致,所以说“另一者不应采纳”。巴利
Theravādoti mahāsumattherādīnaṃ gāho. Suttādiṃ nissāyeva viparītatopi attanomati uppajjatīti āha taṃ panātiādi. Atthenāti attanā nayaggahitena atthena. Pāḷinti attano gāhassa nissayabhūtaṃ sāṭṭhakathaṃ pāḷiṃ. Pāḷiyāti tappaṭikkhepatthaṃ parenāhaṭāya sāṭṭhakathāya pāḷiyā, attanā gahitaṃ atthaṃ nissāya pāḷiñca saṃsanditvāti attho. Ācariyavādeti attanā parena ca samuddhaṭaaṭṭhakathāya. Otarati ceva sameti cāti attanā uddhaṭehi saṃsandanavasena otarati, parena uddhaṭena sameti. Sabbadubbalāti asabbaññupuggalassa dosavāsanāya yāthāvato atthasampaṭipattiabhāvato vuttaṃ. Pamādapāṭhavasena ācariyavādassa suttānulomena asaṃsandanāpi siyāti āha ‘‘itaro na gahetabbo’’ti.
只取与经相符的义理,意思是:凡是与经相合的,就该依照大教示的原则取出来。这里显示的是:那些被引出来的义理,正因为随顺于经,所以他说“因为随顺于经,经本身更有力量”。“不可逆转”就是不可抗拒。“与结集僧团相似”是说它作为标准,与结集僧团相似。“与诸佛住世时相似”意思是与在世的佛陀相似。在“自宗论者取经而说”等句中,凡是如实把握义理而说的,就是自宗论者。“经”指收入三次结集的巴利语圣典。他宗论者,不论住在大寺还是住在别的部派,凡是颠倒把握义理而说的,在这里就称为“他宗论者”。“随顺于经”是指:不论是否收入三次结集,凡是出于颠倒或欺骗而把它说成“这是三次结集所传”的任何内容,都算随顺于经。有人说“其他部派中也有随顺于经”,这并不合理,因为自宗论者和他宗论者双方都只应取收入三次结集的经等。正如后面将说:“凡是收入三次结集、见于巴利圣典的,就应当取”等等。自宗论者并不以其他部派的经等作为标准来取,如果按他们所说的经等来立论,那就得站在他们的立场上了;而且后面还将说:“对方从经中举出大量理由和判定来证明那是不允许的……接受‘萨度’之后,仍应坚持那是不允许的。”因此,他宗论者也显示未收入三次结集的就是未收入,只不过差别在于:他们那些经等未收入三次结集的,是伪造的;已收入的,则因文句相似而作出不同意图的连结。其中,伪造的部分要去掉;被作不同连结的部分,为了显示它的颠倒,就用别的经等来与之对照。然而,如果他宗论者所持的意图与经等相符,自宗论者也应放下自己的主张而接受。因此应当知道:双方都以收入三次结集的经等为标准。正因如此,在《论事》中,自宗方面有五百经,他宗方面有五百经,共一千经,都是因为意图取舍的不同,只取收入三次结集的内容,而不是其他部派中的任何东西。巴利
Samentameva gahetabbanti ye suttena saṃsandanti, evarūpāva atthā mahāpadesato uddharitabbāti dasseti tathā tathā uddhaṭaatthānameva suttānulomattā, tenāha ‘‘suttānulomato hi suttameva balavatara’’nti. Appaṭivattiyanti appaṭibāhiyaṃ. Kārakasaṅghasadisanti pamāṇattā saṅgītikārakasaṅghasadisaṃ. Buddhānaṃ ṭhitakālasadisanti dharamānakabuddhasadisanti attho. Sakavādī suttaṃ gahetvā kathetītiādīsu yo yathābhūtamatthaṃ gahetvā kathanasīlo, so sakavādī. Suttanti saṅgītittayāruḷhaṃ pāḷivacanaṃ. Paravādīti mahāvihāravāsī vā hotu aññanikāyavāsī vā, yo viparītato atthaṃ gahetvā kathanasīlo, sova idha ‘‘paravādī’’ti vutto. Suttānulomanti saṅgītittayāruḷhaṃ vā anāruḷhaṃ vā yaṃkiñci vipallāsato vā vañcanāya vā ‘‘saṅgītittayāgatamida’’nti dassiyamānaṃ suttānulomaṃ. Keci ‘‘aññanikāye suttānuloma’’nti vadanti, taṃ na yuttaṃ sakavādīparavādīnaṃ ubhinnampi saṅgītittayāruḷhasuttādīnaṃ eva gahetabbato. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘tisso saṅgītiyo āruḷhaṃ pāḷiāgataṃ paññāyati, gahetabba’’ntiādi. Na hi sakavādī aññanikāyasuttādiṃ pamāṇato gaṇhāti, yena tesu suttādīsu dassitesu tattha ṭhātabbaṃ bhaveyya, vakkhati ca ‘‘paro tassa akappiyabhāvasādhakaṃ suttato bahuṃ kāraṇañca vinicchayañca dasseti…pe… ‘sādhū’ti sampaṭicchitvā akappiyeyeva ṭhātabba’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.45). Tasmā paravādināpi saṅgītittaye anāruḷhampi anāruḷhamicceva dassīyati, kevalaṃ tassa tassa suttādino saṅgītittaye anāgatassa kūṭatā, āgatassa ca byañjanacchāyāya aññathā adhippāyayojanā ca viseso. Tattha ca yaṃ kūṭaṃ, taṃ apanīyati. Yaṃ aññathā yojitaṃ, tassa viparītatāsandassanatthaṃ tadaññena suttādinā saṃsandanā karīyati. Yo pana paravādinā gahito adhippāyo suttantādinā saṃsandati, so sakavādināpi attano gāhaṃ vissajjetvā gahetabboti ubhinnampi saṅgītittayāgatameva suttādipamāṇanti veditabbaṃ. Teneva kathāvatthuppakaraṇe sakavāde pañca suttasatāni paravāde pañcāti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. nidānakathā; kathā. aṭṭha. nidānakathā) suttasahassampi adhippāyaggahaṇanānattena saṅgītittayāgatameva gahitaṃ, na nikāyantare kiñcīti.
“呵斥”就是拒绝、丢弃,意思是“要这个干什么”。“谴责”就是责备,意思是“这个愚人知道什么”。“应当纳入经中”:对于某部经,因为这部顺经之作是随顺该经而作的,所以应当把它纳入那部经中,或者纳入另一部与之相应的经中,以义理相合的方式纳入,也就是应当这样对照显示:“以这个理由和那个理由,它在这部经中是相合的。”这是这句话的意思。“此”指自宗论者。“彼”指他宗论者。“师说应当纳入经中”:这部师说是依某部经的注释而展开的,应当把它纳入那部经中,或者纳入另一部与之类似的经中,以前后义理相合的方式纳入。“应谴责的师说”:书写疏忽者,或由分裂戒见者所建立者,此理于一切处皆同。巴利
Khepanti ‘‘kiṃ iminā’’ti paṭikkhepaṃ chaḍḍanaṃ. Garahanti ‘‘kimesa bālo jānātī’’ti nindanaṃ. Sutte otāretabbanti yassa suttassa anulomanato idaṃ suttānulomaṃ akāsi, tasmiṃ, tadanurūpe vā aññatarasmiṃ sutte attanā gahitaṃ suttānulomaṃ atthato saṃsandanavasena otāretabbaṃ, ‘‘iminā ca iminā ca kāraṇena imasmiṃ sutte saṃsandatī’’ti saṃsanditvā dassetabbanti attho. Ayanti sakavādī. Paroti paravādī. Ācariyavādo sutte otāretabboti yassa suttassa vaṇṇanāvasena ayaṃ ācariyavādo pavatto, tasmiṃ, tādise ca aññatarasmiṃ sutte pubbāparaatthasaṃsandanavasena otāretabbaṃ. Gārayhācariyavādoti pamādalikhito, bhinnaladdhikehi vā ṭhapito, esa nayo sabbattha.
为了说明“任何伪经及外道经等言说都不应采纳”,所以说了“经应纳入随顺经之中”等话。《隐秘须大拿》等,是大众部等见解分裂者的著作。通过“等”这个字,也包括了《隐秘邪道》等。自宗论者引用经来说,他宗论者同样引用经等——通过这类说法,其他论争所依的根据也可以按同样的方式了解,所以这里没有说。巴利
Yaṃ kiñci kūṭasuttaṃ bāhirakasuttādivacanaṃ na gahetabbanti dassetuṃ suttaṃ suttānulome otāretabbantiādi vuttaṃ. Guḷhavessantarādīni mahāsaṅghikādibhinnaladdhikānaṃ pakaraṇāni. Ādi-saddena guḷhaummaggādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ . Sakavādī suttaṃ gahetvā katheti, paravādīpi suttantiādinā aññepi vādālambanā vuttanayena sakkā ñātunti idha na vuttā.
像这样,先通过经与随顺经等方式,从总体上指出争论,现在为了通过裁决的方式特别指出争论的根据,并说明经等,所以说了“然而,此净”等话。在“于经与随顺经中”这里,“与”字表示选择,因此也包含了阿阇梨之说等,所以说“显示理由与裁决”。其中,“理由”是指依据经等的方法、由自己的见解引出的根据。“裁决”是指注释书的判定。“理由之影”是指在经等中,对“净”的执取和对“不净”的执取,成为其表征、难以说明、不明显的理由,是理由的相似物,意思是似理由。“已至律”之释为因到达净不净之考察。“应遮止”:应以净想遮止违犯的造作,令其防护心更加坚固。“应截断流”:应截断其中违犯的转起。“重性”指不净性。“以经、决断、理由”:以由经与注释书决断所得的理由。“像这样”等语,是对如上所说之义的总结语。“多余的理由”:在经等中,前者前者名为多余的理由,或是众多的理由。巴利
Evaṃ suttasuttānulomādimukhena sāmaññato vivādaṃ dassetvā idāni visesato vivādavatthuṃ tabbinicchayamukhena suttādīnañca dassetuṃ atha panāyaṃ kappiyantiādi vuttaṃ. Sutte ca suttānulome cāti ettha ca-kāro vikappattho, tena ācariyavādādīnampi saṅgaho, tenāha ‘‘kāraṇañca vinicchayañca dassetī’’ti. Tattha kāraṇanti suttādinayaṃ nissāya attanomatiyā uddhaṭaṃ hetuṃ. Vinicchayanti aṭṭhakathāvinicchayaṃ. Kāraṇacchāyāti suttādīsu ‘‘kappiya’’nti gāhassa, ‘‘akappiya’’nti gāhassa ca nimittabhūtaṃ kicchena paṭipādanīyaṃ avibhūtakāraṇaṃ kāraṇacchāyā, kāraṇapatirūpakanti attho. Vinayañhi patvāti imassa vivaraṇaṃ kappiyākappiyavicāraṇamāgammāti. Rundhitabbanti kappiyasaññāya vītikkamakaraṇaṃ rundhitabbaṃ, taṃnivāraṇacittaṃ daḷhataraṃ kātabbaṃ. Sotaṃ pacchinditabbanti tattha vītikkamappavatti pacchinditabbā. Garukabhāveti akappiyabhāve. Suttavinicchayakāraṇehīti suttena aṭṭhakathāvinicchayena ca laddhakāraṇehi. Evantiādi yathāvuttassa atthassa nigamanavacanaṃ. Atirekakāraṇanti suttādīsu purimaṃ purimaṃ atirekakāraṇaṃ nāma, bahukāraṇaṃ vā.
言出是指从言语而出,意思是说它不间断地持续存在。由于有“所谓‘经’,就是整部律藏”的说法,所以这里再说“经”,指的是阐明这个道理的经藏和阿毗达摩巴利文。所谓“随文”,是指对它的解说,以及向人请教的问答和注释。其中,“问答”是指从导师那里听闻巴利文的含义。“注释”是指巴利文之外的判定。这两者都是跟随巴利文、从文句上阐明含义,所以叫“随文”。在“律”方面,是指律的行为规范,正因如此,下文会说“不舍离律、不逾越”等。其中,所谓“安住”,是指故意犯戒或不犯戒等,所以说“以有惭耻心安住”,这就等于说他是“有惭耻心的人”。在应当说明持律者特征的时候,为什么用这个“有惭耻心”来说呢?所以说了“无惭者……”等。其中,“即使是多闻者”这句,是显示他具备第一个特征。用“看重利养”等句,是显示如果不能安住于律,那么即使具备第一个特征也办不成该办的事,反而只会办不该办的事和无意义的事。僧团分裂的前奏是纷争,也就是僧团的裂痕。巴利
Vācuggatanti vācāya uggataṃ, tattha nirantaraṃ ṭhitanti attho. ‘‘Suttaṃ nāma sakalaṃ vinayapiṭaka’’nti vuttattā puna suttatoti tadatthapaṭipādakaṃ suttābhidhammapāḷivacanaṃ adhippetaṃ. Anubyañjanatoti imassa vivaraṇaṃ paripucchato ca aṭṭhakathāto cāti. Tattha paripucchāti ācariyassa santikā pāḷiyā atthasavanaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāti pāḷimuttakavinicchayo. Tadubhayampi hi pāḷiṃ anugantvā atthassa byañjanato ‘‘anubyañjana’’nti vuttaṃ. Vinayeti vinayācāre, teneva vakkhati vinayaṃ avijahanto avokkamantotiādi. Tattha patiṭṭhānaṃ nāma sañcicca āpattiyā anāpajjanādi hotīti āha ‘‘lajjībhāvena patiṭṭhito’’ti, tena lajjī hotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Vinayadharassa lakkhaṇe vattabbe kiṃ iminā lajjībhāvenāti āha alajjī hītiādi. Tattha bahussutopīti iminā paṭhamalakkhaṇasamannāgamaṃ dasseti. Lābhagarutāyātiādinā vinaye ṭhitatāya abhāve paṭhamalakkhaṇayogo kiccakaro na hoti, atha kho akiccakaro anatthakaro evāti dasseti. Saṅghabhedassa pubbabhāgo kalaho saṅgharāji.
Vitthunatīti 的意思是“撑住/膨胀”,或者“呻吟”,也就是没办法安稳待着,所以接着说“凡……”等话。Ācariyaparamparā 是指诸位导师裁决的传承,正因为这样,下文才说:“舍弃自己的见解……按照导师以及导师的导师所教导的巴利语和问答来了解,才算合适。”因为仅仅知道诸位导师的名字,对了解传承并没有什么实际用处。Pubbāparānusandhito 是指由前文与后文共同的义理关联而了知。Atthato 是指词义、整体义、意欲之义等。Kāraṇato 是指该义得以成立。Theravādaṅga 是指上座部的次第,意思是他们的裁决次第。巴利
Vitthunatīti vitthambhati, nitthunati vā santiṭṭhituṃ na sakkoti, tenāha yaṃ yantiādi. Ācariyaparamparāti ācariyānaṃ vinicchayaparamparā, teneva vakkhati ‘‘attano matiṃ pahāya…pe… yathā ācariyo ca ācariyācariyo ca pāḷiñca paripucchañca vadanti, tathā ñātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti. Na hi ācariyānaṃ nāmamattato paramparājānane payojanamatthi. Pubbāparānusandhitoti pubbavacanassa aparavacanena saha atthasambandhajānanato. Atthatoti padatthapiṇḍatthaadhippetatthādito. Kāraṇatoti tadatthupapattito. Theravādaṅganti theravādapaṭipāṭiṃ, tesaṃ vinicchayapaṭipāṭinti attho.
用这三种特征来说:这里第一种特征说明的是对律的善学;第二种说明他因为有惭耻心而且不动摇,所以能安住;第三种说明他能依据经和注释,顺着它们的道理,按照诸位导师传下来的方法,裁决甚至还没发生的事。所谓“事已现前”,就是因为举罪,违犯的事已经出现在僧团当中。所谓“在举罪者和被举罪者所应说的当中”,就是依这件已现前的事,举罪者以“见、闻”等来说,被举罪者以“有、无”等来说,这就是在应说当中已经说了的意思。因为土喇咤亚和恶说没有出现在总说里,所以就说“五种罪”。三犯恶作,指的是像“对未受具戒者作已受具戒想而讥嫌或非难,犯恶作”等所说的三犯恶作。或某一种罪,指的是像“适时作非时想,犯恶作;适时有疑,犯恶作”等所说的二犯恶作,就是针对这个说的。中间罪,指的是除了各学处中所说的事违犯之外,在其他事违犯中,从因缘起一直到附随事终了之间,中间所说的罪。不过这里因为已经另外立了“观察事”,所以就取剩余的那些中间罪。“掷回燃烧之薪”,这出自散解学处。那里的意思是:把正在燃烧的薪从火盆等里掉出来、还没烧尽的,掷回去,重新放回原来的地方。如果是把已经烧尽的投进去,那就只犯巴吉帝亚。所谓“无犯”,这里也有中间所说的无犯,比如“诸比丘,具神通者于神通境界无犯”等,那也包含在里面。巴利
Imehi ca pana tīhi lakkhaṇehīti ettha paṭhamena lakkhaṇena vinayassa suṭṭhu uggahitabhāvo vutto. Dutiyenassa lajjībhāvena ceva acalatāya ca patiṭṭhitatā. Tatiyena pāḷiaṭṭhakathāsu anurūpena anāgatampi tadanulomato ācariyehi dinnanayato vinicchinituṃ samatthatā. Otiṇṇe vatthusminti codanāvasena vītikkamavatthusmiṃ saṅghamajjhe otiṇṇe. Codakena cuditakena ca vutte vattabbeti evaṃ otiṇṇe vatthuṃ nissāya codakena ‘‘diṭṭhaṃ suta’’ntiādinā cuditakena ‘‘atthi natthī’’tiādinā ca yaṃ vattabbaṃ, tasmiṃ vattabbe vutteti attho. Thullaccayadubbhāsitānaṃ mātikāya anāgatattā ‘‘pañcannaṃ āpattīna’’nti vuttaṃ. Tikadukkaṭanti ‘‘anupasampanne upasampannasaññī ujjhāyati vā khīyati vā āpatti dukkaṭassā’’tiādinā (pāci. 106 thokaṃ visadisaṃ) āgataṃ tikadukkaṭaṃ. Aññataraṃ vā āpattinti ‘‘kāle vikālasaññī āpatti dukkaṭassa, kāle vematiko āpatti dukkaṭassā’’tiādikaṃ (pāci. 250) dukadukkaṭaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Antarāpattinti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ sikkhāpade āgatavatthuvītikkamaṃ vinā aññasmiṃ vatthuvītikkame nidānato pabhuti vinītavatthupariyosānā antarantarā vuttaṃ āpattiṃ. Idha pana ‘‘vatthuṃ oloketī’’ti visuṃ gahitattā tadavasesā antarāpattīti gahitā. Paṭilātaṃ ukkhipatīti idaṃ visibbanasikkhāpade (pāci. 350-351) āgataṃ. Tattha ḍayhamānaṃ alātaṃ aggikapālādito bahi patitaṃ avijjhātameva paṭiukkhipati , puna yathāṭhāne ṭhapetīti attho. Vijjhātaṃ pana pakkhipantassa pācittiyameva. Anāpattinti ettha antarantarā vuttā anāpattipi atthi, ‘‘anāpatti, bhikkhave, iddhimassa iddhivisaye’’tiādi (pārā. 159) viya sāpi saṅgayhati.
“巴拉基格罪”这件事,暂时还不能说——这是针对已经犯戒的人,即使他安住在有惭耻心的状态中、如实发露,也还是难以判定,比如不与取之类的情况,就是对此而说的。但对于淫欲等事上明知故犯的,那就必须说,所以说“淫欲法的违犯”等等。如果有人因为无惭而不肯承认、故意推托,那他的罪即使粗重也无法判定;只要他不如实发露,僧团对他是否犯罪的疑惑没有消除,他就一直等同于被灭摈的人。“微细”是指心念转变的微细,所以微细,因此说“心轻快”,意思是他那颗心是轻快的。“他们”指违犯。“以此为事”指以不与取等为根本。所谓“导师说什么,你就照着做”等等,全都是针对有惭耻心、柔和、有顾虑的人而说的。如果有人如实说明之后,只求清净,那么对他也不该说“你是巴拉基格”,这是因为他即使处在无犯的范畴里也仍被怀疑,因此说“巴拉基格之影”。“清净诸戒”是指在被怀疑犯巴拉基格的那件违犯事上,采取没有巴拉基格这一立场,通过清净那些可忏悔、可出罪的罪来清净诸戒。“三十二相”是从明显的角度作为标志来说的,其实任何合意的所缘都可以拿来作意。“业处相应”是指由于以追悔为根源的散乱,心不显现中断,而是以持续连贯的方式结合运作。“诸行”是就观禅业处而说的。因为对有罪的人来说,即使是熟练的业处也不能好好地现前,更何况是犯了巴拉基格的人。他的心因为倾向追悔,所以无法专一。不过,有一类人本来就寻思散乱等很多,即使戒清净,心也无法入定,这种情况在这里不应算作以巴拉基格为根源。这里正是针对以已作之恶为根源的追悔导致心无法入定,才说“业处不相应”,因此说“被追悔之火”等等。“自己”是以心作为工具,人作为作者而了知;或者“自己”是反身义的具格用法,意思是自己了知自己。巴利
Pārājikāpattīti na tāva vattabbanti idaṃ āpannapuggalena lajjīdhamme ṭhatvā yathābhūtaṃ āvikaraṇepi dubbinicchayaṃ adinnādānādiṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yaṃ pana methunādīsu vijānanaṃ, taṃ vattabbameva, tenāha methunadhammavītikkamo hītiādi. Yo pana alajjitāya paṭiññaṃ adatvā vikkhepaṃ karoti, tassa āpatti na sakkā oḷārikāpi vinicchinituṃ, yāva so yathābhūtaṃ nāvi karoti, saṅghassa ca āpattisandeho na vigacchati, tāva nāsitakova bhavissati. Sukhumāti cittaparivattiyā sukhumatāya sukhumā. Tenāha ‘‘cittalahukā’’ti, cittaṃ tassa lahukanti attho. Teti vītikkame. Taṃvatthukanti adinnādānādimūlakaṃ. Yaṃ ācariyo bhaṇati, taṃ karohītiādi sabbaṃ lajjīpesalaṃ kukkuccakameva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yo yāthāvato pakāsetvā suddhimeva gavesati, tenāpi, pārājikosīti na vattabboti anāpattikoṭiyāpi saṅkiyamānattā vuttaṃ, teneva ‘‘pārājikacchāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sīlāni sodhetvāti yasmiṃ vītikkame pārājikāsaṅkā vattati, tattha pārājikābhāvapakkhaṃ gahetvā desanāvuṭṭhānagāminīnaṃ āpattīnaṃ sodhanavasena sīlāni sodhetvā. Dvattiṃsākāranti pākaṭabhāvato upalakkhaṇavasena vuttaṃ, yaṃ kiñci abhirucitaṃ manasikātuṃ vaṭṭateva. Kammaṭṭhānaṃ ghaṭiyatīti vippaṭisāramūlakena vikkhepena antarantarā khaṇḍaṃ adassetvā pabandhavasena cittena saṅghaṭiyati. Saṅkhārāti vipassanākammaṭṭhānavasena vuttaṃ. Sāpattikassa hi paguṇampi kammaṭṭhānaṃ na suṭṭhu upaṭṭhāti, pageva pārājikassa. Tassa hi vippaṭisāraninnatāya cittaṃ ekaggaṃ na hoti. Ekassa pana vitakkavikkhepādibahulassa suddhasīlassapi cittaṃ na samādhiyati, taṃ idha pārājikamūlakanti na gahetabbaṃ. Katapāpamūlakena vippaṭisārenevettha cittassa asamādhiyanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘kammaṭṭhānaṃ na ghaṭiyatī’’ti vuttaṃ, tenāha vippaṭisāragginātiādi. Attanāti cittena karaṇabhūtena puggalo kattā jānāti, paccatte vā karaṇavacanaṃ, attā sayaṃ pajānātīti attho.
词义分别的注释巴利
Padabhājanīyavaṇṇanā
“如所见”就是“像什么样”。因为“yathā”这个词表达的是“yaṃ”这个词的意思,所以说“以任何一种方式相应”。“以任何一种方式”这两个词,是不确定地显示“yaṃ”这个词的意思。“相应于住的义务”就是相应于观行的义务。“何种生”就是“什么样的生”,指人,他就是“何种生者”,在自身意义上加上“ya”后缀。按姓氏来说,以任何一种姓氏而成为如姓者或如彼姓者,这是关联。“于诸戒”就是于本性戒。“然而”这个词是“可是”的意思。“所说为何”就是它的意思。“于此义”就是于此巴拉基格的范围。“此”就是以如上所说的各种方式相应。“于圣”是指像这样说的“为圣者而住,这是圣者的乞求”,不是“给我”那种卑贱的乞求。“以相承受”是指即使没有“我要去乞食”的心,也以承受依乞食而活的出家相。“担食”就是由担挑而来的食物。“于非法”是因为没有增上戒学等比丘功德而说的,所以说“于非真实”。说“我们是比丘”的人,仅仅凭宣称就是比丘,但并非真实,这是它的意思。这“我们是比丘”,即使对宣称者来说也是可能发生的,所以这样说。即使不宣称“我们是比丘”的人,由于取比丘称呼之相,以及取僧团所施资具之份等,也就名为比丘的宣称。正如在《人施设注》中这样说:巴利
Yo viya dissatīti yādiso, yaṃ-saddatthe yathā-saddo vattatīti āha ‘‘yena vā tena vā yutto’’ti. Yena tenāti hi padadvayena aniyamato yaṃ-saddatthova dassito. Vāsadhurayuttoti vipassanādhurayutto. Yā jāti assāti yaṃjāti, puggalo, sova yaṃjacco sakatthe yapaccayaṃ katvā. Gottavasena yena vā tena vā gottena yathāgotto vā tathāgotto vā hotūti sambandho. Sīlesūti pakatīsu. Atha khoti idaṃ kintūti imasmiṃ atthe. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hotīti attho. Imasmiṃ attheti imasmiṃ pārājikavisaye. Esoti yathāvuttehi pakārehi yutto. Ariyāyāti ‘‘uddissa ariyā tiṭṭhanti, esā ariyānaṃ yācanā’’ti evaṃ vuttāya, na, ‘‘dehi me’’ti kapaṇāya. Liṅgasampaṭicchanenāti ‘‘bhikkhaṃ carissāmī’’ti cittābhāvepi bhikkhāhāranissitapabbajjāliṅgassa sampaṭicchanena. Kājabhattanti kājehi ānītabhattaṃ. Adhammikāyāti adhisīlasikkhādibhikkhuguṇābhāvato vuttaṃ, tenāha ‘‘abhūtāyā’’ti. ‘‘Mayaṃ bhikkhū’’ti vadantā paṭiññāmatteneva bhikkhū, na atthatoti attho. Idañca ‘‘mayaṃ bhikkhū’’ti paṭijānanassāpi sambhavato vuttaṃ. ‘‘Mayaṃ bhikkhū’’ti appaṭijānantāpi hi bhikkhuvohāranimittassa liṅgassa gahaṇena ceva bhikkhūnaṃ dinnapaccayabhāgaggahaṇādinā ca bhikkhupaṭiññā eva nāma honti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ puggalapaññattiaṭṭhakathāyaṃ –
有人明明不是梵行者,却对外宣称自己是梵行者。他看到别的梵行者穿着整齐的下衣、披着整齐的上衣、拿着磨得发亮的钵,在村镇、聚落、王都里乞食谋生,自己也照着同样的样子去做、同样地行事,这就等于在宣称“我是梵行者”。但如果他说“我是比丘”,然后进入伍波萨他堂等场所,那他就是确实在宣称梵行;同样,接受僧团所得利养的人也是如此。巴利
‘‘‘Abrahmacārī brahmacāripaṭiñño’ti aññe brahmacārino sunivatthe supārute sumbhakapattadhare gāmanigamajanapadarājadhānīsu piṇḍāya caritvā jīvikaṃ kappente disvā sayampi tādisena ākārena tathā paṭipajjanato ‘ahaṃ brahmacārī’ti paṭiññaṃ dento viya hoti. ‘Ahaṃ bhikkhū’ti vatvā uposathaggādīni pavisanto pana brahmacāripaṭiñño hotiyeva, tathā saṅghikaṃ lābhaṃ gaṇhanto’’ti (pu. pa. aṭṭha. 91).
因此,不能和那种只凭口头宣称就自称比丘、甚至到了种姓者地步的人一起共享受用,那只是无惭者的受用。不过,故意犯戒等属于无惭相的说法,是就最上等的比丘来说的,因为沙弥等也可以看出有无惭的表现。经里确实说过:“不应让无惭的沙弥做手工。”不按照所制定的行持去做,这是一切人共通的无惭相。无道德的人,从受取形相开始,就因为不按照所制定的行持去做,决定是无惭者,就像大僧祇部等部派之间的人,也像持相者等人一样。只要他们那些比丘的宣称还维持着,那时就算比丘,和他们一起受用就是无惭者的受用;而且那些以“这是比丘僧团”的想法而布施的东西,就叫做布施给僧团。世尊确实说过:巴利
Tasmā evarūpehi paṭiññāya bhikkhūhi gotrabhupariyosānehi saddhiṃ sambhogaparibhogo na vaṭṭati, alajjīparibhogova hoti. Sañcicca āpattiāpajjanādialajjīlakkhaṇaṃ pana ukkaṭṭhānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vasena vuttaṃ sāmaṇerādīnampi alajjīvohāradassanato. ‘‘Alajjīsāmaṇerehi hatthakammampi na kāretabba’’nti hi vuttaṃ. Yathāvihitapaṭipattiyaṃ atiṭṭhanañhi sabbasādhāraṇaṃ alajjīlakkhaṇaṃ. Dussīlā liṅgaggahaṇato paṭṭhāya yathāvihitapaṭipattiyā abhāvato ekantā lajjinova mahāsaṅghikādinikāyantarikā viya, liṅgatthenakādayo viya, ca. Yāva 11 ca tesaṃ bhikkhupaṭiññā anuvattati, tāva bhikkhu eva, tehi ca paribhogo alajjipaabhogova, tesañca bhikkhusaṅghasaññāya dinnaṃ saṅghe dinnaṃ nāma hoti. Vuttañhi bhagavatā –
阿难,未来世会有一些种姓者,脖子挂着袈裟,却是无道德、品性恶劣的人。人们会以僧团的名义,向这些无道德的人布施。阿难,那时我说,施予僧团的供养,功德不可胜数、不可计量。巴利
‘‘Bhavissanti kho panānanda, anāgatamaddhānaṃ gotrabhuno kāsāvakaṇṭhā dussīlā pāpadhammā, tesu dussīlesu saṅghaṃ uddissa dānaṃ dassanti, tadāpāhaṃ, ānanda, saṅghagataṃ dakkhiṇaṃ asaṅkhyeyyaṃ appameyyaṃ vadāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.380).
因为布施是冲着世尊的僧团而给的,所以这份供养就变成了不可计数、不可衡量的。那是不是因为布施给了破戒的人,所以就不是不可衡量的呢?不是。因为对那些破戒者所给的布施,仍然是“冲着僧团”而给的,是以他们作为“种姓者”的接受者身份来认定的。如果不是这样,就会变成“在任何一个在家人或出家人身上,只要是冲着僧团而施”都算数,那就有这个过失了。这样一来,“阿难,那时我……”这段开示下限的话就没有意义了。所以,即使没有种姓者,也不存在“冲着僧团而施”的布施;以最低限度而言,即使布施给那些人,施向僧团的供养也是不可计数的,并非在此之上才成立。因此,只要他们是自称的比丘,就应当这样接受。巴利
Bhagavato saṅghaṃ uddissa dinnattā dakkhiṇā asaṅkhyeyyā appameyyā jātā. Dussīlānaṃ dinnattā nāti ce? Na, tesu saṅghaṃ uddissāti gotrabhūnaṃ paṭiggāhakattena parāmaṭṭhattā, itarathā ‘‘yesu kesuci gahaṭṭhesu vā pabbajitesu vā saṅghaṃ uddissā’’ti vattabbatāpasaṅgato, tathā ca ‘‘tadāpāhaṃ, ānandā’’ti heṭṭhimakoṭidassanassa payojanaṃ na siyā. Tasmā gotrabhūnampi abhāve saṅghaṃ uddissa dānaṃ natthi, heṭṭhimakoṭiyā tesupi dinnā saṅghagatā dakkhiṇā asaṅkhyeyyā, na tato paraṃ sijjhatīti tepi paṭiññāya bhikkhu evāti gahetabbaṃ.
梵音:就是最上的音声,或者与梵天神的音声相似的声音。来吧,比丘们——这里的“比丘们”是呼唤语。在轮回中看到怖畏的人,为了彻底消灭这种怖畏,来皈依三宝,或者来皈依教法——以心念“这是我的庇护、我的窟宅”,这样进入、靠近。靠近之后,就修行梵行:也就是修行教法梵行和道梵行。剃发者:就是剃光了头发的人。刀:指用来切割齿木等的刀子。系缚:指绑在身上的带子。相应:就是瑜伽,通过定和慧而相应,那就是相应瑜伽;它具备这八种资具,这是剩余的意思。仅仅以身体上佩戴的标记来辨认,这是剩余的意思。本来应该说“三百”,但为了偈颂格律的顺畅,所以说成“三百”。巴利
Brahmaghosanti uttamaghosaṃ, brahmuno ghosasadisaṃ vā ghosaṃ. Ehi bhikkhūti ‘‘bhikkhū’’tisambodhanaṃ. Saṃsāre bhayaikkhaka tassa bhayassa sabbaso vināsanatthaṃ tisaraṇaṃ, sāsanaṃ vā ehi manasā ‘‘tāṇaṃ leṇa’’nti pavisa upagaccha. Upagantvāpi cara brahmacariyanti sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ maggabrahmacariyañca carassu. Bhaṇḍūti muṇḍitakeso. Vāsīti dantakaṭṭhādicchedanavāsi. Bandhananti kāyabandhanaṃ. Yutto yogo samādhipaññāvasena so yuttayogo, tassa aṭṭhete parikkhārāti seso. Sarīre paṭimukkehiyeva upalakkhitoti seso. ‘‘Tīṇi satānī’’ti vattabbe gāthābandhasukhatthaṃ ‘‘tīṇi sata’’nti vuttaṃ.
所以世尊是在回指前面说过的话。前面确实说过:“迦叶,我只是在知道的时候才说‘我知道’,只是在看见的时候才说‘我看见’。”(《相应部》2.154)世尊就是在回指这句话,意思是:因为我是带着知而说的,所以说“因此”。这里的“此”,是指这个教法。“强烈”,就是深重。“将会现前”,意思是:在去亲近长老等人之前,愿我的惭愧心先一步现前。“与善相应”,就是依止于没有过失的法。“当作要务”,就是把这法当作自己切身要紧的事,或者把这法当作“这是我的利益”而视为目标。“倾注耳根”,就是把耳根投向法上。“迦叶,你就应当这样学”,意思是:以智慧的耳和净信的耳一起倾注,作意“我要恭敬地听闻正法”,就应当这样修学。“与乐俱行的身至念”,就是以不净和入出息为所缘、依初禅而与乐相应的身至念。长老恭敬领受这番教诫,就成了长老的出家与受达上。(《相应部注》2.2.154)巴利
Tasmāti bhagavā heṭṭhā vuttaṃ parāmasati. Heṭṭhā hi ‘‘ahaṃ kho pana, kassapa, jānaññeva vadāmi ‘jānāmī’ti, passaññeva vadāmi ‘passāmī’’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.154) vuttaṃ, taṃ parāmasati, yasmā ahaṃ jānaṃ vadāmi, tasmāti attho. Ihāti imasmiṃ sāsane. Tibbanti mahantaṃ. Paccupaṭṭhitaṃ bhavissatīti therādiupasaṅkamanato puretarameva tesu yaṃnūna me hirottappaṃ upaṭṭhitaṃ bhavissatīti attho. Kusalūpasaṃhitanti anavajjadhammanissitaṃ. Aṭṭhiṃ katvāti attānaṃ tena dhammena aṭṭhikaṃ katvā, taṃ vā dhammaṃ ‘‘esa me attho’’ti atthaṃ katvā. Ohitasototi dhamme nihitasoto. Evañhi te, kassapa, sikkhitabbanti ñāṇasotañca pasādasotañca odahitvā ‘‘dhammaṃ sakkaccameva suṇissāmī’’ti evameva tayā sikkhitabbaṃ. Sātasahagatā ca me kāyagatāsatīti asubhesu ceva ānāpāne ca paṭhamajjhānavasena sukhasampayuttakāyagatāsati. Yaṃ panetassa ovādassa sakkaccapaṭiggahaṇaṃ, ayameva therassa pabbajjā ca upasampadā ca ahosi (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.154).
以膨胀腐尸的相为所缘的禅那,就是“膨胀腐尸想”。以遍处为所缘的色界禅那,就是“色想”。以上这两者,是以“想”为总名而指示的两种禅那法。索巴咖被世尊问到时,回答说:“从色界的性质来说,两者意义相同,只是文字表达不同。”“心已欢喜”:就是心已得到满足。至于受持重法等而受达上的内容,后面自然会说明。巴利
Uddhumātakapaṭibhāgārammaṇaṃ jhānaṃ uddhumātakasaññā. Kasiṇārammaṇaṃ rūpāvacarajjhānaṃ rūpasaññā. Imeti saññāsīsena niddiṭṭhā ime dve jhānadhammā. Sopāko ca bhagavatā puṭṭho ‘‘rūpāvacarabhāvena ekatthā, byañjanameva nāna’’nti āha. Āraddhacittoti ārādhitacitto. Garudhammapaṭiggahaṇādiupasampadā upari sayameva āvi bhavissati.
“以最究竟的方式”指的是以最彻底的界限。白四甘马是达上甘马的成因,所以称为“处”;与那个处相应的“堪当”,就是指远离所依污点等过失的甘马,称为“堪当其处”,因为带有所依等过失的甘马,从本质上就不具备甘马语的堪当性。或者,“处”是指包含三学的教法,因为它是证得涅槃的因;与它相应的甘马就是“堪当其处”。因为只有通过符合规定特征的甘马而达上的人,才能领受并圆满整个教法。因此,以清净甘马语为终结的一切僧团事务,都叫“堪当其处”,所以说“堪当导师教法”,意思就是:与戒等圆满具足整个教法者相应。这是此处所说的含义。虽然因为一切学处都是针对以白四甘马达上的人来说的,所以对于那些通过“善来比丘”等达上方式出家的清净善士,在违犯制戒罪学处时,从字面上看,或者显示为无能力犯,或者显示为无过失;但从实际意义上说,他们在制戒罪上,或者在世间罪如饮酒等轻罪上,在道果生起之前,仍然确实可能以非故意等方式犯戒。正如所说:“两种人不可能犯戒:佛与独觉佛。两种人可能犯戒:比丘与比丘尼。”不过,“以白四甘马达上的人”这句话,是就一切时候都可能违犯一切学处的人,按多数情况来说的。从词源角度,即从解释词义的角度;从称名角度,即从世俗言说的角度;从功德角度,即从比丘称名所依据的诸功德的角度。巴利
Sabbantimena pariyāyenāti sabbantimena paricchedena. Ñatticatutthā kammavācā upasampadākammassa kāraṇattā ṭhānaṃ, tassa ṭhānassa arahaṃ anucchavikanti vatthudosādivinimuttakammaṃ ‘‘ṭhānāraha’’nti vuttaṃ vatthādidosayuttassa kammassa sabhāvato kammavācārahattābhāvā. Atha vā ṭhānanti nibbānappattihetuto sikkhattayasaṅgahaṃ sāsanaṃ vuccati, tassa anucchavikaṃ kammaṃ ṭhānārahaṃ. Yathāvihitalakkhaṇena hi kammena upasampannova sakalaṃ sāsanaṃ samādāya paripūretumarahati. Tasmā parisuddhakammavācāpariyosānaṃ sabbaṃ saṅghakiccaṃ ṭhānārahaṃ nāma, tenāha ‘‘satthusāsanārahenā’’ti, sīlādisakalasāsanaparipuṇṇassa anucchavikenāti attho. Ayaṃ imasmiṃ attheti ñatticatutthakammena upasampannasseva sabbasikkhāpadesu vuttattā kiñcāpi ehibhikkhūpasampadādīhi upasampannānaṃ suddhasattānaṃ paṇṇattivajjasikkhāpadavītikkamepi abhabbatā vā dosābhāvo vā saddato paññāyati, tathāpi atthato tesampi paṇṇattivajjesu, lokavajjesupi vā surāpānādilahukesu magguppattito pubbe asañciccādinā āpattiāpajjanaṃ sijjhatiyeva. Tathā hi ‘‘dve puggalā abhabbā āpattiṃ āpajjituṃ buddhā ca paccekabuddhā ca. Dve puggalā bhabbā āpattiṃ āpajjituṃ bhikkhū ca bhikkhuniyo cā’’ti (pari. 322) vuttaṃ. Ñatticatutthena kammena upasampannoti idaṃ pana sabbasikkhāpadavītikkamārahe sabbakālike ca bhikkhū gahetvā yebhuyyavasena vuttaṃ. Niruttivasenāti nibbacanavasena. Abhilāpavasenāti vohāravasena. Guṇavasenāti bhikkhuvohāranimittānaṃ guṇānaṃ vasena.
共同生活一词的分别注释巴利
Sājīvapadabhājanīyavaṇṇanā
为了说明“戒等以出离轮回为所依,并且因为超胜世间法,所以用增上戒等名称来称呼”,接着开始“那么,什么是”等文。其中,“五支戒、十支戒”是就佛陀未出世时的戒而说的,因为那时戒还不具备出离轮回的所依性。然而,在佛陀出世时,近事男、近事女以及沙弥、在学尼如实了知三宝的功德,对教法生起深深净信,他们所守护的五支戒、八支戒、十支戒,也因为能成为生起观与道的因,所以同样是增上戒。因为巴帝摩卡防护戒能作为观与道生起的缘,所以相对于世间的戒,它就成了增上戒,就像增上心那样。如果抛开作为观与道之缘这一点,那么除了世间心之外,增上心并没有别的什么差别可得。而这两者——戒与心——由于无始以来轮回中没有我、没有实质,被无常等三相所破坏,又以“我、我所”的方式运作,以无明、渴爱等过失为根本——能够摧毁这些过失根本的观,以戒和心的力量为基础,依靠观的增上圆满,就能消除这轮回;而宣说这种法的人,也就是正自觉者,具备一切智等无量功德,能无颠倒地宣说正法,如实了知并依之修行的人应当受持学习,因此它成为出离轮回的所依——并不是靠别的什么原因。如果这种出离轮回的所依性,在教法中的五戒等也同样具备,那它们为什么不是增上戒呢?因为仅仅停留在五戒等上的给孤独等在家众,也能生起道。没有增上戒和增上心,道就不能生起;而戒和心,对某些人来说,虽然因为缺乏近依止,在这一生中不能成为道生起的因,但在来生必定会成为因,就像临命终时持增上戒的贤善凡夫所持的巴帝摩卡防护戒那样,因此说“唯于佛陀出世时方得现起”等。即使是为了祈求出离轮回而受持守护的五戒等,也唯于佛陀出世时方得现起。“并非彼所施设”等语,则是就最胜义、指全部巴帝摩卡而说的。因为即使是其中一部分,比如在家戒中的不杀生、不与取等,也唯有诸佛能依律藏中巴拉基格经分别等所载的方式,在身、语二门中完全截断障碍道生起的违犯之流,从而施设它成为道生起的近因,别人做不到。正是就道之生起而言,才说这戒是增上戒。因此说:“即便就巴帝摩卡防护戒而言,唯有与道果相应的戒,才是增上戒。”因为正是这与道果相应的戒,由于无间隔地成为道的所依,所以叫增上戒。这里所谓“非所指”,是指在这个初巴拉基格之处,“学”并不是所指的意思。巴利
Vivaṭṭūpanissayā sīlādayo lokiyehi abhivisiṭṭhattā adhisīlādivohārena vuttāti dassetuṃ katamaṃ panātiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha pañcaṅgadasaṅgasīlanti abuddhuppādakāle sīlaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ tassa vivaṭṭūpanissayattābhāvā. Yaṃ pana buddhuppāde ratanattayaguṇaṃ tathato ñatvā sāsane suniviṭṭhasaddhāhi upāsakopāsikāhi ceva sāmaṇerasikkhamānāhi ca rakkhiyamānaṃ pañcaṅgaaṭṭhaṅgadasaṅgasīlaṃ, tampi adhisīlameva magguppattihetuto. Vipassanāmagguppattinimittatāya hi pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlaṃ lokiyānaṃ sīlehi adhisīlaṃ jātaṃ adhicittaṃ viya. Na hi vipassanāmagganimittataṃ muñcitvā lokiyacittato adhicittassa añño koci viseso upalabbhati, tadubhayañca anādimato saṃsāravaṭṭassa attādisāravirahitatāya tilakkhaṇabbhāhatattaṃ, ‘‘ahaṃ mamā’’ti ākārena pavattaavijjātaṇhādidosamūlakattañca, taṃdosamūlaviddhaṃsanasamatthāya sīlacittabalopatthaddhāya vipassanāya ukkaṃseneva tassa saṃsāravaṭṭassa vigamañca, tadupadesakassa sammāsambuddhassa sabbaññutādiaparimitaguṇagaṇayogena aviparītasaddhammadesakattañca yāthāvato ñatvā paṭipannena samādāya sikkhitabbatāya vivaṭṭūpanissayaṃ jātaṃ, na aññena kāraṇena, tañca vivaṭṭūpanissayattaṃ yadi sāsane pañcasīlādissāpi samānaṃ, kimidaṃ adhisīlaṃ na siyā. Pañcasīlādimatte ṭhitānañhi anāthapiṇḍikādīnaṃ gahaṭṭhānampi maggo uppajjati. Na hi adhisīlādhicittaṃ vinā magguppatti hoti, tañca kiñcāpi kesañci anupanissayatāya tasmiṃ attabhāve magguppattiyā hetu na hoti, tathāpi bhavantare avassaṃ hotevāti adhisīlameva kālaṃ karontānaṃ kalyāṇaputhujjanānaṃ pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlaṃ viya, tenāha buddhuppādeyeva ca pavattatītiādi. Vivaṭṭaṃ patthetvā rakkhiyamānampi pañcasīlādi buddhuppādeyeva pavattati. Na hi taṃ paññattintiādi pana ukkaṭṭhavasena sabbaṃ pātimokkhaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tadekadesabhūtampi hi pāṇātipātādinnādānādigahaṭṭhasīlampi. Buddhāyeva vinaye pārājikasuttavibhaṅgādīsu āgatavasena sabbaso kāyavacīdvāresu magguppattiyā vibandhakaajjhācārasotaṃ vicchinditvā magguppattiyā padaṭṭhānabhāvena paññapetuṃ sakkonti, na aññe. Magguppattiṃ sandhāya hissa adhisīlatā vuttā. Tenāha ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvaratopi ca maggaphalasampayuttameva sīlaṃ adhisīla’’nti. Tasseva hi adhisīlanti abyavadhānena maggādhiṭṭhānāti. Idha anadhippetanti imasmiṃ paṭhamapārājikavisaye ‘‘sikkhā’’ti anadhippetaṃ.
“世间八等至心”这句话,是针对那些不了解教法本质的世间人所能进入的、与八种色界和无色界禅那相应的心而说的。因为在广大心里,并没有世间与出世间的区分,所以不能用“世间”这个限定词来排除出世间。因此,这里是用“排除教法中修行者所能进入的广大禅那”来作为“世间”这个限定词的含义。就像这里一样,在“欲界八善心”那里,也应该加上“世间”这个限定词。这正是增上心区别于普通心的地方——即它是在不了解教法的人心中生起的。这样一来,即使在佛陀没有出世的时代,那些了解教法本质的独觉佛等人,他们的戒和心的增上戒、增上心性也仍然可以成立。“并非没有佛陀出世”这句话,是针对其他人缺乏令其现观之因,以及独觉佛、菩萨等没有宣说能力而说的。不过,为了未来熏习的因,他们也会宣说戒和心;这虽然因为是道的因所以也算是增上戒和增上心,但由于微劣、没有广泛传播、不为大众所知,所以被视为无效,因此才作出“唯于佛陀出世时”这一限定,应当这样理解。再者,在增上心的解说处以及下文增上慧的解说处,根据注疏中“非他们至”等文句,由于排除了与道果相应的增上心和增上慧,可知世间的增上心和增上慧才是这里所指的;对于入定于这两者的人,其行淫的本性也可以被了知。然而在巴利原文中,因为说“此增上戒学,即此义中所指之学”,所以可以知道世间的增上心和增上慧也不是这里所指的。因此,对巴利原文和注疏的意趣应当这样理解:当“我将行淫法”这个心念仅仅生起时,世间的增上心和增上慧就退失了,而增上戒则不会因为心念的生起而退失,所以巴利原文中只说增上戒学。注疏中则是为了显示这个差别——已经获得出世间道的比丘,因为彻底不再生起,连“我将行淫”的心念也完全不会生起;而凡夫中证得等至的人,由于某种因缘还是可能生起——为了显示这个差别,才说“非他们至”,应当知道这是只排除了出世间者。巴利
Lokiyaaṭṭhasamāpatticittānīti sāsanasabhāvaṃ ajānantehi lokiyajanehi samāpajjitabbāni aṭṭha rūpārūpajjhānasampayuttacittāni sandhāya vuttaṃ. Na hi mahaggatesu lokiyalokuttarabhedo atthi, yena lokiyavisesanaṃ lokuttaranivattanaṃ siyā. Tasmā sāsanikehi samāpajjitabbamahaggatajjhānanivattanameva lokiyavisesanaṃ kataṃ. Yathā cettha, evaṃ kāmāvacarāni pana aṭṭha kusalacittānīti etthāpi lokiyavisesanaṃ kātabbameva. Ayameva hi adhicittato cittassa bhedo, yaṃ sāsanaṃ ajānantassa puggalassa samuppajjanaṃ. Evañca abuddhuppādepi sāsanasabhāvaṃ jānantānaṃ paccekabuddhādīnampi sīlacittānaṃ adhisīlādhicittatā samatthitā hoti. Na vinā buddhuppādāti idaṃ pana aññesaṃ abhisamayahetubhāvena paccekabuddhabodhisattādīnaṃ desanāsāmatthiyābhāvato vuttaṃ. Āyatiṃ vāsanāhetuṃ pana sīlacittaṃ tepi desentiyeva, tañca maggahetutāya adhisīlādhicittampi hontaṃ appakatāya vipphārikatābāhujaññattābhāvena abbohārikanti ‘‘buddhuppādeyevā’’ti avadhāraṇaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ. Na hi taṃsamāpannotiādiaṭṭhakathāvacanehi idha adhicittaniddese, upari adhipaññāniddese ca maggaphalasampayuttaadhicittaadhipaññānameva paṭikkhepato lokiyādhicittādhipaññānaṃ idha adhippetatā, taṃ dvayaṃ samāpannassāpi methunadhammasamāpajjanasabhāvo ca viññāyati, pāḷiyaṃ pana ‘‘yāyaṃ adhisīlasikkhā, ayaṃ imasmiṃ atthe adhippetā sikkhā’’ti vuttattā lokiyāpi adhicittādhipaññā anadhippetāti viññāyati. Tasmā pāḷiyaṃ aṭṭhakathāyañca evamadhippāyo veditabbo – ‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevissāmī’’ti citte uppannamatte lokiyaṃ adhicittaṃ adhipaññā ca parihāyati, adhisīlaṃ pana cittuppādamattena na parihāyatīti pāḷiyaṃ adhisīlasikkhāva vuttā. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana paṭiladdhalokuttaramaggassa bhikkhuno ‘‘methunaṃ paṭisevissāmī’’ti cittampi na uppajjati sabbaso akuppadhammattā, puthujjanānaṃ samāpattilābhīnampi kenaci kāraṇena uppajjati kuppadhammattāti imaṃ visesaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘na hi taṃsamāpanno’’ti lokuttarāva paṭikkhittāti veditabbaṃ.
“有施与”这句话里,“施与”指的是布施的思心所,意思是:所施与的果报是存在的。这个道理也适用于“有祭祀”等处。“等”这个字涵盖了祭火等内容。其中,“祭祀”指大祭,就是普遍共享的大布施。“祭火”指足够的供养,或是为自己,或是为他人。十不善业道,乃至一切不善法,因为不产生利益,所以不算自己的业;与此相反的善法才算自己的业;或者,善与不善两者,依据“业是自己所有的”等说法,在轮回运转持续时,以执取之义成为众生的所有——如此以业为自己所有,在自身相续中以了解自己所有物的方式生起的智,就是“业为自己所有之智”,这仅仅是举例说明。依止教法的一切趣向轮回的善慧,都归入业为自己所有之智中。依止教法的一切趣向出离的慧,都称为“随顺谛之智”。这就是增上慧;其余一切属于业为自己所有之智,应当这样理解。因此世尊把业为自己所有之智、随顺谛之智、具道者之智、具果者之智,全部归纳在四智之中。而“了别三相的观察智”,这是就作为道的近因、以最殊胜的意义而说的。其余三宝随念等慧,因为能作为道的因,同样具有增上慧的性质,应当这样理解。巴利
Atthi dinnanti ettha dinnanti dānacetanā adhippetā, tassa dinnassa phalaṃ atthīti attho. Esa nayo atthi yiṭṭhanti etthāpi. Ādi-saddena hutādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Tattha yiṭṭhanti mahāyāgo sabbasādhāraṇaṃ mahādānameva. Hutanti pahonakasakkāro, attano vā hotu, paresaṃ vā dasa akusalakammapathā, sabbepi vā akusalā dhammā anatthuppādanato na sakaṃ kammaṃ nāma, tabbiparītā kusalā dhammā sakaṃ nāma, tadubhayampi vā kusalākusalaṃ kammassakomhītiādivacanato sati saṃsārappavattiyaṃ adhimuccanaṭṭhena sattānaṃ sakanti evaṃ kammassakatāya sakabhāve attano santakatāya uppajjanakañāṇaṃ kammassakataññāṇaṃ, upalakkhaṇamattañcetaṃ. Sāsananissitā pana sabbāpi vaṭṭagāminikusalapaññā kammassakataññāṇe paviṭṭhā. Sāsananissitā hi vivaṭṭagāminī sabbāpi paññā ‘‘saccānulomikañāṇa’’nti vuccati. Sā eva ca adhipaññā tadavasesaṃ sabbaṃ kammassakataññāṇanti veditabbaṃ, teneva bhagavā ‘‘kammassakataññāṇaṃ saccānulomikañāṇaṃ maggasamaṅgissa ñāṇaṃ phalasamaṅgissa ñāṇa’’nti sabbampi ñāṇacatukkeyeva saṅgahesi. Tilakkhaṇākāraparicchedakaṃ pana vipassanāñāṇanti idaṃ pana maggassa āsannapaccayatāya ukkaṭṭhavasena vuttaṃ. Taditarāsañhi ratanattayānussaraṇādipaññānampi maggahetutāya adhipaññatā samānāvāti gahetabbaṃ.
舍弃分别的注释巴利
Paccakkhānavibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
“虚弱未表明”是指在“我干脆舍弃佛陀”这类话里所显示出的虚弱状态。“挂在嘴上”是指:就像世人说七、八等数目时随顺口头习惯那样,这里的意思也是如此。在“二夜三夜”(巴吉帝亚第五十二)这条学处中,并不是按中间有间断的共宿方式取三夜,而是不间断地与未受具足戒者共宿整整三夜,为了取从日出时算起的三夜,所以用“二夜三夜”这种不间断的说法;由此也能看出“二夜”这个词是有用意的。同样,在这里,为了说明“虚弱未表明”这个说法也有用意,所以才说“或者因为舍弃学处”等。巴利
Dubbalyeāvikateti yaṃnūnāhaṃ buddhaṃ paccakkheyyantiādinā dubbalabhāve pakāsite. Mukhāruḷhatāti lokajanānaṃ sattaṭṭhātiādīsu mukhāruḷhañāyenāti adhippāyo. Dirattatirattanti (pāci. 52) ettha yathā antarantarā sahaseyyāvasena tirattaṃ aggahetvā nirantarameva tisso rattiyo anupasampannena saddhiṃ sahaseyyāya aruṇuṭṭhāpanavasena tirattaggahaṇatthaṃ ‘‘dirattatiratta’’nti abyavadhānena vuttanti dirattaggahaṇassa payojanampi sakkā gahetuṃ, evamidhāpi dubbalyaṃ anāvikatvāti imassāpi gahaṇassa payojanamatthevāti dassetuṃ yasmā vā sikkhāpaccakkhānassātiādi vuttaṃ.
现在,为了说明“没有把虚弱说出来”这句话本身就是对前面那句话的解释,即使离开前面那句也仍然有它独立的意义,所以说了“又”等等。“有差别和无差别”:在这里,如果某种说法只是把虚弱说出来,而没有舍弃学处,那么舍弃学处和说出虚弱这两者之间就有差别。但如果某种说法把这两者都包含在内,那么在那种说法里就既不能说有差别,也不能说没有差别——这就是“有差别和无差别”的意思。因为字根里读作“艰难生活”,所以说了“达到艰难生活”。厌恶就是“ukkaṇṭhā”,它从这里离去就是“ukkaṇṭhito”,意思是达到了艰难生活。他的脖子向上抬起,因此是“ukkaṇṭhā”,由于不欢喜,就像在林中因牛群受阻而寻找道路的人一样,那个人就是“ukkaṇṭho”,那个“ukkaṇṭha”。为了说明“从不欢喜这里离去也是ukkaṇṭhito”这个意思,他说:“把脖子向上抬着而住。”而那种厌恶状态正是由于散乱,所以说了“散乱”等等。巴利
Idāni dubbalyaṃ anāvikatvāti imassa purimapadasseva vivaraṇabhāvaṃ vināpi visuṃ atthasabbhāvaṃ dassetuṃ apicātiādi vuttaṃ. Visesāvisesanti ettha yena vākyena dubbalyāvikammameva hoti, na sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ, tattha sikkhāpaccakkhānadubbalyāvikammānaṃ aññamaññaṃ viseso hoti. Yena pana vacanena tadubhayampi hoti, tattha nevatthi viseso avisesopi, taṃ visesāvisesaṃ. ‘‘Kaṭha kicchajīvane’’ti dhātūsu paṭhitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘kicchajīvikappatto’’ti. Ukkaṇṭhanañhi ukkaṇṭhā, taṃ ito gatoti ukkaṇṭhito, kicchajīvikaṃ pattoti attho. Uddhaṃ gato kaṇṭho etissāti ukkaṇṭhā, anabhiratiyā vaje niruddhagogaṇo viya gamanamaggaṃ gavesanto puggalo ukkaṇṭho hoti, taṃ ukkaṇṭhaṃ. Anabhiratiṃ itotipi ukkaṇṭhitoti atthaṃ dassento āha – ‘‘uddhaṃ kaṇṭhaṃ katvā viharamāno’’ti. Sā ca ukkaṇṭhatā vikkhepenevāti vikkhittotiādi vuttaṃ.
所谓“沙门性”,是指从受达上开始。所谓“以种种存在的分别方式”,意思是:从比丘的身份退失之后,想要获得某种在家人的身份等等,于是心里盘算“我应该是那样的”,对自己将来的存在作出分别,以这种种在家人的形态,也就是以对自己将来存在加以分别的方式——这就是这段话的意思。巴利
Samaṇabhāvatoti upasampadato. Bhāvavikappākārenāti bhikkhubhāvato cavitvā yaṃ yaṃ gihiādibhāvaṃ pattukāmo ‘‘ahaṃ assa’’nti attano bhavanaṃ vikappeti, tena tena gihiādiākārena, attano bhavanassa vikappanākārenāti adhippāyo.
46 在圣典中,“然而我若”这句话的意思是:我如果舍弃佛陀,那该多好。“或我”“来吧我”在这里也应当按照前面已经说过的方式来理解它的意思。他说“我有舍弃佛陀”,意思是我的心里生起了这样的念头。巴利
46.Pāḷiyaṃyadi panāhanti ahaṃ yadi buddhaṃ paccakkheyyaṃ, sādhu vatassāti attho. Apāhaṃ, handāhanti etthāpi vuttanayeneva attho gahetabbo. ‘‘Hoti me buddhaṃ paccakkheyya’’nti mama cittaṃ uppajjatīti vadati.
50 我不欢喜,是在说明出家生活苦多、没有快乐。我不欣喜,是在说明即使出家生活确实有无过失的快乐,自己对它也没有欣喜。巴利
50.Naramāmīti pabbajjāya dukkhabahulatāya sukhābhāvaṃ dasseti. Nābhiramāmīti pabbajjāya vijjamānepi anavajjasukhe attano abhiratiabhāvaṃ dasseti.
51 51. 所谓“正是通过言语上的差别”,意思是:即使已经做出了言语上的差别,也排除了用其他身体动作来让人知道的情况。以“此人想舍弃教法”等说法为例,说明的是:即使因为不擅长语言而完全不懂词句的含义,只要他还知道“这个人想舍弃自己的出家身份,才做出这样的言语差别”这一点点所指向的意思,那就已经构成舍弃。因此说“即使只知道这一点点”。“词句的后转”,就是词句的变转;除了摩揭陀语以外,其余一切语言都应理解为“边地语”。“田本身已经进入”,意思是:作为舍学处得以生起的田本身已经进入了。巴利
51.Teneva vacībhedenāti vacībhedaṃ katvāpi aññena kāyappayogena viññāpanaṃ nivatteti. Ayaṃ sāsanaṃ jahitukāmotiādinā bhāsākosallābhāvena sabbaso padatthāvabodhābhāvepi ‘‘ayaṃ attano pabbajitabhāvaṃ jahitukāmo imaṃ vākyabhedaṃ karotī’’ti ettakaṃ adhippetatthamattaṃ cepi so tāva jānāti, paccakkhānameva hotīti dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘ettakamattampi jānātī’’ti. Padapacchābhaṭṭhanti padaparāvatti, māgadhabhāsato avasiṭṭhā sabbāpi bhāsā ‘‘milakkhabhāsā’’ti veditabbā. Khettameva otiṇṇanti sikkhāpaccakkhānassa ruhanaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ khettameva otiṇṇaṃ.
“使者”是指口头传信。“教法”是指书信,或者在墙壁、柱子等上面刻写文字来让人知道。说“与心相应”,是针对心里还存着想要舍弃的念头时、言语表达就随之生起这一点而说的,意思是“由心生起”。为了说明有定限和没有定限这两种方式所造成的理解差别,所以说了“如果只有这个人知道”等话。另外,这里说的“说”和“令知”,应当理解为:对谁说,就只有那个人在领会,这是按照前面所说的道理得出的,并不是说“一个人说,另一个人知道”这个意思能够成立。由于说了“即使他们中只有一个人知道”,所以应当理解为:像这样“让两个人知道,让一个人不知道”,即使限定了两个人知道而告知,在他们中只要有一个人知道,就仍然构成舍弃。所谓“怀疑”,就是怀疑“他们会阻止”。所谓“知时”,就是知道教法的约定;但在这里,仅仅通过知道意图本身,也就名为知时,因此说了“厌离”等话。所以,即使完全知道“我舍弃佛”等这一类词句的意义,如果不知道“他是由于想从比丘身份退失而这样说”这一意图,学处就仍然没有被舍弃。反之,即使不知道意义,但知道“他是厌离而说”,学处就已经被舍弃了。在耳识过程中,只是取声本身;取意义则是由意识过程相续而来的,因此说了“就在那一刹那”等话。巴利
Dūtanti mukhasāsanaṃ. Sāsananti paṇṇasāsanaṃ, bhittithambhādīsu akkharaṃ vā chinditvā dasseti. Paccakkhātukāmatācitte dharanteyeva vacībhedasamuppattiṃ sandhāya ‘‘cittasampayutta’’nti vuttaṃ, cittasamuṭṭhānanti attho. Niyamitāniyamitavasena vijānanabhedaṃ dassetumāha yadi ayameva jānātūtiādi. Ayañca vibhāgo vadati viññāpetīti ettha yassa vadati, tasseva vijānanaṃ adhippetanti iminā vuttanayena laddhoti daṭṭhabbaṃ, na hettha ekassa vadati aññassa viññāpetīti ayamattho sambhavati. ‘‘Tesu ekasmiṃ jānantepī’’ti vuttattā ‘‘dveyeva jānantu eko mā jānātū’’ti evaṃ dvinnampi janānaṃ niyametvā ārocitepi tesu ekasmimpi jānante paccakkhānaṃ hotiyevāti gahetabbaṃ. Parisaṅkamānoti ‘‘vāressantī’’ti āsaṅkamāno. Samayaññūti sāsanasaṅketaññū, idha pana adhippāyamattajānanenāpi samayaññū nāma hoti, tenāha ukkaṇṭhitotiādi. Tasmā buddhaṃ paccakkhāmītiādikhettapadānaṃ sabbaso atthaṃ ñatvāpi sace ‘‘bhikkhubhāvato cavitukāmatāya esa vadatī’’ti adhippāyaṃ na jānāti, appaccakkhātāva hoti sikkhā. Atthaṃ pana ajānitvāpi ‘‘ukkaṇṭhito vadatī’’ti taṃ jānāti, paccakkhātāva hoti sikkhā. Sotaviññāṇavīthiyā saddamattaggahaṇameva, atthaggahaṇaṃ pana manoviññāṇavīthiparamparāyāti āha taṅkhaṇaññevātiādi.
53 功德庄严指阐明佛陀功德庄严的论著。在优波离偈颂中,指在《优波离经》里,优波离居士所说的坚定者、离痴者等偈颂。如所闻的意思是,就是巴利圣典里所说的那样。无边智等,是功德庄严中出现的名称。坚定者等则见于优波离偈颂中。其中,菩提指一切知智,因为它是了知的因,所以具有这种智的人就叫菩提智者。在善说之法等处,法这个词是为了表明善说等词是法的同义词才说的。因此,当说“我舍善说”等时,就是以同义词的方式在舍。如果和法这个词结合起来说,就应知道是按如所闻的方式在舍。在善行道之僧等处,道理也一样。善法等也是依据善法、不善法等分类中的法而说的名称;否则,如果舍的是不善法,就会犯下“没有过失的过失”,所以特别指出八万四千法蕴等。第一巴拉基格等,应知唯指学处,而不是指罪。巴利
53.Vaṇṇapaṭṭhānanti satthuguṇavaṇṇappakāsakaṃ pakaraṇaṃ. Upāligāthāsūti upālisutte upāligahapatinā dhīrassa vigatamohassātiādinā vuttagāthāsu. Yathārutanti pāḷiyaṃ vuttamevāti attho. Anantabuddhītiādīni vaṇṇapaṭṭhāne āgatanāmāni. Dhīrantiādīni (ma. ni. 2.76) pana upāligāthāsu. Tattha bodhi vuccati sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ, sā jānanahetuttā paññāṇaṃ etassāti bodhipaññāṇo. Svākkhātaṃ dhammantiādīsu dhamma-saddo svākkhātādipadānaṃ dhammavevacanabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vutto. Tasmā svākkhātaṃ paccakkhāmītiādinā vutteyeva vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ nāma hoti. Dhamma-saddena saha yojetvā vutte pana yathārutavasena paccakkhānanti veditabbaṃ. Suppaṭipannaṃ saṅghantiādīsupi eseva nayo. Kusalaṃ dhammantiādīnipi kusalā dhammā akusalā dhammātiādidhammameva (dha. sa. tikamātikā 1) sandhāya vuttanāmāni, itarathā akusaladhammapaccakkhāne dosābhāvappasaṅgatoti, tenāha caturāsītidhammakkhandhasahassesūtiādi. Paṭhamapārājikantiādinā sikkhāpadānaṃyeva gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ, na āpattīnaṃ.
“以谁为根本”是指在谁跟前。在阿阇梨的同义词中,如果有人没给依止师,自己以阿阇梨的身份给人剃度出家,针对这个人,才说“谁度我出家”。“以他为根本”是指在他跟前。“奥卡洛”是对那些因饥渴等苦而身体瘦弱、形貌憔悴的在家人所用的称呼。“束髻者”是指扎着发髻的在家人。“童子”是指还在孩童阶段、年纪很小的沙弥。“策洛”是指比童子稍大一点的。“策陀”是指中等大小的。“束髻大者”是指大沙弥。“沙弥侍者”是沙弥的通称。“不净、可疑、可忆念的行为”:自身不净后,自己怀疑“别人是否知道我所做的事”,以及他人怀疑“这是不是某人所做”而可被忆念的行为;“生杂秽”:因生起贪等杂染而成为杂秽。“贡陀”是破戒者的同义词。巴利
Yassa mūlenāti yassa santike. Ācariyavevacanesu yo upajjhaṃ adatvā ācariyova hutvā pabbājesi, taṃ sandhāya ‘‘yo maṃ pabbājesī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tassa mūlenāti tassa santike. Okallakoti khuppipāsādidukkhāturānaṃ kisalūkhasarīravesānaṃ gahaṭṭhamanussānaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Moḷibaddhoti baddhakesakalāpo gahaṭṭho. Kumārakoti kumārāvattho ativiya daharo sāmaṇero. Cellakoti tato kiñci mahanto. Ceṭakoti majjhimo. Moḷigalloti mahāsāmaṇero. Samaṇuddesoti avisesato sāmaṇerādhivacanaṃ. Asucisaṅkassarasamācāroti asuci hutvā ‘‘mayā kataṃ pare jānanti nu kho, na nu kho’’ti attanā, ‘‘asukena nu kho idaṃ kata’’nti parehi ca saṅkāya saritabbena anussaritabbena samācārena yutto. Sañjātarāgādikacavarattā kasambujāto. Koṇṭhoti dussīlādhivacanametaṃ.
54 “三因结生者”这句话,是针对能极其迅速地了知的能力而说的,并不是说二因者在这种情况下完全不可能生起。“同类”指男性。“异类”指女性。“形如陶器者”指与泥土等所造的形状相似者。“重智者”指心在所缘上不能轻快运转、行相迟钝而智慧沉重的人;这里所说的就是钝智者。巴利
54.Tihetukapaṭisandhikāti atikhippaṃ jānanasamatthe sandhāya vuttaṃ, na duhetukānaṃ tattha asambhavato. Sabhāgassāti purisassa. Visabhāgassāti mātugāmassa. Potthakarūpasadisassāti mattikādīhi katarūpasadisassa . Garumedhassāti ārammaṇesu lahuppavattiyā abhāvato dandhagatikatāya garupaññassa, mandapaññassāti vuttaṃ hoti.
现在,针对这里“舍戒品”的巴利原文和注释书中所说内容的要点,应当这样作判断:其中,用“想要退出沙门性”等词句,说明心的限定;用“佛”等词句,说明对象的限定;用“我舍”“我持”说明时间的限定;用“说”说明加行的限定;用“我于佛已足够”“佛于我何用”“于我无益”“我已善解脱”等,说明即使没有提到时间,舍戒也能成立;用“令知”说明了知的限定;用“疯癫者舍戒”“在疯癫者跟前”等,说明人的限定;用“他不能理解”等,说明因为没有理解的限定,所以没有舍戒;用“以戏笑”等,说明因为没有心的限定,所以没有舍戒;用“想让人听到却不让人听到”,说明因为没有加行的限定,所以没有舍戒;用“对无智者说,对智者不说”等,说明是针对哪个人而说,只有那个人听到时舍戒才成立,不是别人。又说“或者完全不说,戒就没有舍”,这是为了说明:只有依心等限定,舍戒才成立,不是依其他方式。因此,应当知道:依心、对象、时间、加行、人、了知这些限定,舍戒才成立;如果缺少这些,就没有舍戒。巴利
Idānettha sikkhāpaccakkhānavārassa pāḷiyaṃ aṭṭhakathāyañca vuttanayānaṃ sampiṇḍanatthavasena evaṃ vinicchayo veditabbo – tattha hi sāmaññā cavitukāmotiādīhi padehi cittaniyamaṃ dasseti. Buddhantiādīhi padehi khettaniyamaṃ, paccakkhāmi dhāretīti etena kālaniyamaṃ, vadatīti iminā payoganiyamaṃ, alaṃ me buddhena, kiṃ nu me, na mamattho, sumuttāhantiādīhi anāmaṭṭhakālavasenapi paccakkhānaṃ hotīti dasseti, viññāpetīti iminā vijānananiyamaṃ, ummattako sikkhaṃ paccakkhāti ummattakassa santiketiādīhi puggalaniyamaṃ, so ca nappaṭivijānātītiādīhi vijānananiyamābhāvena paccakkhānābhāvaṃ dasseti, davāyātiādīhi cittaniyamābhāvena, sāvetukāmo na sāvetīti iminā payoganiyamābhāvena, aviññussa sāveti viññussa na sāvetīti etehi yaṃ puggalaṃ uddissa sāveti, tasseva savane sīsaṃ eti, nāññassāti. Sabbaso vā pana na sāveti appaccakkhātā hoti sikkhāti idaṃ pana cittādiniyameneva sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti, na aññathāti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tasmā cittakhettakālapayogapuggalavijānanavasena sikkhāya paccakkhānaṃ ñatvā tadabhāvena appaccakkhānaṃ veditabbaṃ.
怎么舍呢?只有生起想舍弃比丘身份的心,才会舍戒;如果只是开玩笑或吵闹着说,就不算舍戒。也就是说,舍戒取决于心念,没有这个心念就不成立。
同样地,在“我舍佛”等说法里,从佛开始到同梵行者为止,共有十四种对象;在“请记住我是居士”等说法里,从居士开始到非释迦子为止,共有八种对象。这二十二种对象中,不管针对哪一种,只要想说任何一种同义的说法,不管说的是什么,都成立舍戒。也就是说,舍戒取决于所说的对象范围,没有这个对象就不成立。
其中,“我舍”和“请记住我”是现在时的说法;而“佛对我已经够了”“佛对我有什么用”“佛对我没有意义”“我已从佛很好地解脱”这四句,是动词形式不指明时间,和前面十四句配合起来说的。舍戒就依这些同义说法而成立;但如果有人说“你舍了”“你将舍”“你记住我了”“你将记住我”“不如舍了吧”这类过去、未来或假设的说法,就不成立。也就是说,舍戒取决于现在时或不指明时间的说法,没有这样的说法就不成立。
行为方式有两种:身体的行为和言语的行为。其中,以“我舍佛”这种方式,用任何语言发出言语,仅仅通过言语的行为就成立舍戒;不是靠写字,也不是靠做手势等身体行为。也就是说,舍戒取决于言语的行为,没有言语的行为就不成立。巴利
Kathaṃ? Upasampannabhāvato cavitukāmatācitteneva hi sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti, na davā vā ravā vā bhaṇantassa. Evaṃ cittavasena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena. Tathā buddhaṃ paccakkhāmītiādinā vuttānaṃ buddhādīnaṃ sabrahmacāripariyosānānaṃ catuddasannañceva gihīti maṃ dhārehītiādinā vuttānaṃ gihiādīnaṃ asakyaputtiyapariyosānānaṃ aṭṭhannañcāti imesaṃ dvāvīsatiyā khettapadānaṃ yassa kassaci savevacanassa vasena tesu yaṃ kiñci vattukāmassa yaṃ kiñci vadatopi sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti. Evaṃ khettavasena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena. Tattha yadetaṃ ‘‘paccakkhāmīti ca maṃ dhārehīti cā’’ti vuttaṃ vattamānakālavacanaṃ, yāni ca ‘‘alaṃ me buddhena, kiṃ nu me buddhena, na mamattho buddhena, sumuttāhaṃ buddhenā’’tiādinā nayena ākhyātavasena kālaṃ anāmasitvā purimehi cuddasahi padehi saddhiṃ yojetvā vuttāni alaṃ metiādīni cattāri padāni, tesaṃyeva ca savevacanānaṃ vasena paccakkhānaṃ hoti, na pana ‘‘paccakkhāsi’’nti vā, ‘‘paccakkhissa’’nti vā, ‘‘maṃ dhāresī’’ti vā, ‘‘maṃ dhāressasī’’ti vā, ‘‘yaṃnūna paccakkheyya’’nti vātiādīni atītānāgataparikappavacanāni bhaṇantassa. Evaṃ vattamānakālavasena ceva anāmaṭṭhakālavasena ca paccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena. Payogo pana duvidho kāyiko vācasiko, tattha buddhaṃ paccakkhāmītiādinā nayena yāya kāyaci bhāsāya vacībhedaṃ katvā vācasikapayogeneva paccakkhānaṃ hoti, na akkharalikhanaṃ vā hatthamuddādidassanaṃ vā kāyapayogaṃ karontassa. Evaṃ vācasikapayogeneva paccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena.
人则有两种:一种是舍戒的人,一种是对之舍戒的人。其中,舍戒的人如果不是疯狂者、心散乱者、受剧痛折磨者中的任何一种;而对方如果是人类,也不是疯狂者等类,并且现前在场,那么舍戒就成立。因为对方不现前时,通过使者或书信告知,是不生效的。如此,舍戒是依如上所说的人而成立,不是依其缺无而成立。
了知也有两种:决定的和不决定的。其中,如果决定地对一人或多人说“我告知此人”或“我告知这些人”,而他们像世间普通人那样听了话、在作意之时就能理解,那么在他话说完的当下,以“这人厌离了”或“这人想要过在家生活”等任何一种方式,只要有人类理解了话语的意思,学处就已经舍了。如果后来才想“他说的是什么意思”然后才明白,或者是别人明白,那就没有舍。如果不决定地告知,则按前面所说,只要有任何一个人类理解了话语的意思,学处就舍了。如此,舍戒是依了知而成立,不是依其缺无而成立。
因此应当知道,舍戒正是依这些所说的心等条件而成立,不是以其他方式。巴利
Puggalo pana duvidho yo ca paccakkhāti, yassa ca paccakkhāti, tattha yo paccakkhāti, so sace ummattakakhittacittavedanaṭṭānaṃ aññataro na hoti, yassa pana paccakkhāti, so sace manussajātiko hoti, na ca ummattakādīnaṃ aññataro sammukhībhūto ca, sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti. Na hi asammukhībhūtassa dūtena vā paṇṇena vā ārocanaṃ ruhati. Evaṃ yathāvuttapuggalavasena paccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena. Vijānanampi niyamitāniyamitavasena duvidhaṃ. Tattha yassa yesaṃ vā niyametvā imassa imesaṃ vā ārocemīti vadati, sace te yathā pakatiyā loke manussā vacanaṃ sutvā āvajjanasamaye jānanti, evaṃ tassa vacanānantarameva ‘‘ayaṃ ukkaṇṭhito’’ti vā, ‘‘gihibhāvaṃ patthayatī’’ti vā yena kenaci ākārena manussajātiko vacanatthaṃ jānāti, paccakkhātāva hoti sikkhā. Atha aparabhāge ‘‘kiṃ iminā vutta’’nti cintetvā jānanti, aññe vā jānanti, appaccakkhātāva hoti. Aniyametvā ārocentassa pana sace vuttanayena yo koci manussajātiko vacanatthaṃ jānāti, paccakkhātā hoti sikkhā, evaṃ jānanavasena paccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena. Iti imesaṃ vuttappakārānaṃ cittādīnaṃ vaseneva sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti, na aññathāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
根本制定的注释巴利
Mūlapaññattivaṇṇanā
55 从“从此以后”开始,就是从粗恶句开始。为了说明淫欲法本身固然是粗恶的,同样,由于它被见等粗恶法所围绕,所以也是粗恶的,因此说了“因为”等话。“不干涸者”是指被淫欲贪所浸透的人。“被缠缚者”是指心被淫欲贪所制伏的人。因为“methuna”这个词有表示相似词的用法,所以说了“相似的”,意思是以贪染等而相似。这是就多数情况说的,因为即使双方中有一方没有贪染,另一方的淫欲行为仍然可以成立。或者,“methuna”这个词是表示两者的词,methuna就是一对、一双、两者,在意义上是一回事,因此说“两者俱贪染”。因为经里也说“双双结合”。“以相”是具格词用于处格义,意思是将自己的相放入女相之中。相与生殖器在意义上是一回事。“如胡麻果实”指的是像芥子那么大的胡麻种子,不是带荚的果实,所以说“仅如胡麻种子大小”。“在湿润处”是指本性被遮蔽的相、未被自然风吹触到的湿润部位。那样的部位即使因为风等某种变化而变干,仍然算是“非不湿润处”,从着手时起就犯巴拉基格。巴利
55.Itopaṭṭhāyāti duṭṭhullapadato paṭṭhāya. Methunadhammo yathā sarūpeneva duṭṭhullaṃ, evaṃ dassanādiduṭṭhulladhammaparivārattāpi duṭṭhullanti dassetuṃ yasmātiādi vuttaṃ. Avassutānanti methunarāgena tintānaṃ. Pariyuṭṭhitānanti methunarāgena abhibhūtacittānaṃ. Methuna-saddassa sadisasaddapaayāyattā vuttaṃ ‘‘sadisāna’’nti, rattatādīhi sadisānanti attho. Idañca yebhuyyato vuttaṃ ubhosu aññatarassa rāgābhāvepi itarassa methunasevanasaṃsiddhito. Methuna-saddo vā ubhayasaddapaayāyo, methunaṃ yugaḷaṃ yamakaṃ ubhayanti hi atthato ekaṃ, tenāha ‘‘ubhinnaṃ rattāna’’nti. ‘‘Dvayaṃdvayasamāpattī’’ti hi pāḷiyampi vuttaṃ. Nimittenāti bhummatthe karaṇavacanaṃ, itthinimitte attano nimittaṃ pavesetīti attho. Nimittaṃ aṅgajātanti atthato ekaṃ. Tilaphalanti sāsapamattaṃ tilabījaṃ adhippetaṃ, na kosasahitaṃ phalanti āha ‘‘tilabījamattampī’’ti. Allokāseti sabhāvena pihitassa nimittassa pakativātena asamphuṭṭhe tintappadese. Tādiso padeso sacepi kenaci vātādivikārena sukkhati, tathāpi anallokāsoti upakkamato pārājikameva.
所谓“中间”,是指像进入时不碰到四边那样,在如此张开的女性根门的内侧平面,这叫作内侧平面。而在男性根门中说到“中间”,是指顶端而言。“上方”是指:以中节弯曲后进入的男根,其顶端就像弯曲手指的中节背面那样。“从下方进入”是指:以女性根门的下部被触碰的方式进入,也就是说,就像用自己的男根碰到女性根门下方空处的下侧平面,哪怕只有芝麻粒那么大,这样进入的意思。这里触碰本身就是进入,其余各处也是这样。“从中间进入”是指:以被内侧平面触碰的方式进入,也就是像碰到内侧平面那样进入的意思。如果在任何地方都没碰到就进入,然后只是悬在空中抽出来,那不犯巴拉基格罪,但会犯恶作罪,就像断头事(《巴拉基格》73)中那样。“以中间触碰的方式进入”是指:以顶端触碰的方式进入。“以中节背面收缩后”是指:把自己的男根用中节背面弯曲后,以上方部分触碰的方式进入。像什么呢?应连接为“像弯曲的手指”。或者,关联为“以中节背面,像弯曲的手指”,也可以连接为“像用中节背面进入弯曲的手指那样”。“以上方部分”是指:收缩后的男根的上方顶端。巴利
Vemajjhanti yathā cattāri passāni aphusanto paveseti, evaṃ katavivarassa itthinimittassa abbhantaratalaṃ vuccati. Purisanimitte pana majjhanti aggakoṭiṃ sandhāya vadati. Uparīti majjhimapabbena samiñjitvā pavesiyamānassa aṅgajātassa samiñjitaṅguliyā majjhimapabbapiṭṭhisadisaaggakoṭiyeva. Heṭṭhā pavesentoti itthinimittassa heṭṭhābhāgena chupiyamānaṃ pavesento, yathā itthinimittassa allokāsaṃ heṭṭhimatalaṃ tilabījamattampi attano nimittena chupati, evaṃ pavesentoti attho. Chupanameva hettha pavesanaṃ, evaṃ sesesupi. Majjhena pavesentoti abbhantaratalena chupiyamānaṃ pavesento, yathā abbhantaratalaṃ chupati, evaṃ pavesentoti attho. Katthaci acchupantaṃ pavesetvā ākāsagatameva nīharantassa natthi pārājikaṃ, dukkaṭaṃ pana hoti chinnasīsavatthusmiṃ (pārā. 73) viya. Majjheneva chupantaṃ pavesentoti aggakoṭiyā chupantaṃ pavesento. Majjhimapabbapiṭṭhiyā saṅkocetvāti nimittaṃ attano majjhimapabbapiṭṭhiyā samiñjitvā uparibhāgena chupantaṃ pavesentopi. Kiṃ viya? Samiñjitaṅguli viyāti yojanā. Atha vā majjhimapabbapiṭṭhiyā samiñjitaṅguli viyāti sambandho, samiñjitaṅguliṃ vā majjhimapabbapiṭṭhiyā pavesento viyātipi yojetabbaṃ. Uparibhāgenāti saṅkocitassa nimittassa uparikoṭiyā.
现在,为了说明男性根门中,依据前面所说六处里被称为“上方”的第六处,分别取四边而有的十种差别,而说出“在那里”等语句。而前面则是以“未取之取”的方式说了六处。“以如秤杆般进入者”,是指不弯曲而径直进入者。所谓“皮桩”,是指在根门上生起的、如同山羊等颈部的皮芽,也称“uṇṇigaṇḍo”。这里不说“受损的身净色”,而说“已坏的身净色”,是为了显示:在有执受的情况下,即使身净色因某种缘而受损,也如同在“受损根门事”中那样,仍是巴拉基格罪。然而应知,女性根门即使已坏,在有执受的情况下,也如同在尸体中一样,并不失去作为巴拉基格罪田地的性质。“以淫欲乐”,是指在有身触染着的情况下,犯桑喀地谢萨,这是所说之义。“种子”,是指睾丸。巴利
Idāni purisanimittassa heṭṭhā vuttesu chasu ‘‘uparī’’ti vuttassa chaṭṭhassa ṭhānassa vasena visuṃ cattāri passāni gahetvā purisanimitte dasaṭṭhānabhedaṃ dassento tatthātiādimāha. Heṭṭhā pana agahitaggahaṇavasena cha ṭhānāni vuttāni. Tulādaṇḍasadisaṃ pavesentassāpīti asamiñjitvā ujukaṃ pavesentassa. Cammakhīlanti eḷakādīnaṃ gīvāya viya nimitte jātaṃ cammaṅkuraṃ, ‘‘uṇṇigaṇḍo’’tipi vadanti. ‘‘Upahatakāyappasāda’’nti avatvā naṭṭhakāyappasādanti vacanena upādinnabhāve sati kenaci paccayena upahatepi kāyappasāde upahatindriyavatthusmiṃ (pārā. 73) viya pārājikamevāti dasseti. Itthinimittassa pana naṭṭhepi upādinnabhāve sati matasarīre viya pārājikakkhettatā na vijahatīti veditabbā. Methunassādenāti idaṃ kāyasaṃsaggarāge sati saṅghādiseso hotīti vuttaṃ. Bījānīti aṇḍāni.
“不遮住脸”的意思是:即使因为放逸而笑,也不用扇子遮挡,就这样坐着,是不恭敬的,这是所说的意思。或者,“遮住”就是遮盖起来,意思是:不应该用扇子遮着脸笑而坐。“露齿”就是露出牙齿。“以放肆者”是指:不因为“这是不合适的谈论”而有所收敛,也就是在毫无保留地说出自己意图时,已经生起了兴致,这是意思。巴利
Mukhaṃ apidhāyāti pamādena samuppannampi hāsaṃ bījaniyā paṭicchādanampi akatvā nisīdanaṃ agāravanti vuttaṃ. Atha vā apidhāyāti pidahitvā, bījaniyā mukhaṃ paṭicchādetvā hasamānena na nisīditabbanti attho. Dantavidaṃsakanti dante dassetvā. Gabbhitenāti ‘‘ayuttakathā’’ti saṅkocaṃ anāpajjantena, niravasesādhippāyakathane sañjātussāhenāti attho.
关于随制定的注释巴利
Anupaññattivaṇṇanā
成为巴拉基格事者:在三道中,只要连芝麻粒大小的根门进入空间存在,那些男女等一切类别都包含在内,其他则不算。这里说“畜生女”等,是依照经文语句的随顺,并非指全部,而是以女性性别来说。“牛蛇”是一种特别的蛇,背上有很多很大的圆形斑纹。龟和蛙虽然是四足,但因为同属水生的共通性,所以和无足的算在一起。“口形”是指唇皮的形状。“伤口类别”是指伤口的归类。伤口中的土喇咤亚,应依照“以非道进入非道,犯土喇咤亚”这句经文来理解。“蒙哥兽”是指獴。正是为了说明“谁犯此,即击败他”这个意义,在解说巴拉基格等词的词源时,才诵出这首《附随》偈颂。“脱离者”是指从教法中退失的人。“被弃者”是指被排斥的人。“此”是指巴拉基格罪这种犯行形态。“断者”是指中间被截断的人。巴利
Pārājikavatthubhūtāti yesaṃ tīsu maggesu tilabījamattampi nimittassa pavesokāso hoti, te itthipurisādibhedā sabbe saṅgayhanti, na itare. Idha pana tiracchānagatāyāti-pāḷipadānurūpato na sabbātiādinā itthiliṅgavasena vuttaṃ. Gonasāti sappavisesā, yesaṃ piṭṭhīsu mahantamahantāni maṇḍalāni honti. Kacchapamaṇḍūkānaṃ catuppadattepi odakatāsāmaññena apadehi saha gahaṇaṃ. Mukhasaṇṭhānanti oṭṭhacammasaṇṭhānaṃ. Vaṇasaṅkhepanti vaṇasaṅgahaṃ. Vaṇe thullaccayañca ‘‘amaggena amaggaṃ paveseti, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti (pārā. 66) imassa suttassa vasena veditabbaṃ. Maṅgusāti nakulā. Etameva hi atthanti yo naṃ ajjhāpajjati, taṃ parājetīti imamatthaṃ vuttānaṃyeva pārājikādisaddānaṃ nibbacanappasaṅge imissā parivāragāthāya pavattattā. Bhaṭṭhoti sāsanato parihīno. Niraṅkatoti nirākato. Etanti āpattirūpaṃ pārājikaṃ. Chinnoti antarākhaṇḍito.
对于“本性比丘们”这句话,这里所谓的“本性者”,是指没有犯巴拉基格罪、也没有被举罪(默摈)的比丘。不过有些人说:“因为注疏里说‘应当和本性比丘们一起作’,所以和那些处于本性状态的无惭者一起举行伍波萨他等僧团甘马,也没有过失。”这种说法不对,因为这句话并不能成立那个意思。如果要作僧团甘马,就只能和本性者一起作,不能和非本性者一起作——这句话的目的是禁止和非本性者共住,而不是说应当和一切本性者(包括无惭者之类)一起作僧团甘马。这样一来,关于共住的规定就是:即使在本性者当中,如果犯了相同的罪,也禁止彼此之间以及与无惭者一起作甘马。因为注疏中已经说过:“如果整个僧团在有相同罪过时,没有按照所说的方式作,就举行伍波萨他,那么整个僧团就按照所说的方式犯戒”等等(《疑惑度疏·因缘品释》)。又说“凡是物质受用允许的地方,法的受用在那里也允许”——但由于与无惭者一起受用在注疏中是被禁止的,而一起作甘马也属于法的受用。因此,就像在巴利圣典中,为了限定犯巴拉基格罪的人,说“凡是以白四甘马……(中略)……受具足戒者”,在这个“比丘”一词里,如果要把一切以白四甘马受具足戒、犯巴拉基格罪的人都限定进去,这个限定不能成立,因为也有未犯巴拉基格罪的有学等圣者;而应当这样限定:只有在以白四甘马受具足戒的人当中,才有犯巴拉基格罪的无惭愚痴凡夫,而不是在“善来比丘”等其他方式受戒的人当中——限定才能成立。同样,在这里,也只有在本性者当中,才能找到适合作甘马、不犯戒、有惭、有悔、欲学戒的人,而不是在非本性者当中——限定才能这样成立,因为非本性者不能充当僧团人数,且从“非共住者”的限定来看也是如此。然而无惭者虽然可以充当僧团人数而使甘马得以完成,但他们未被列入非共住者之中;当他们没有履行应当作的程序,就和那些人混杂在一起作甘马时,那些人的罪过以及无惭的状态都不会消失。应当知道这一点。因为注疏中说:“一个无惭者,甚至能作无惭者的事”(《巴拉基格注》2.585),所以接下来会说“一切有惭者在这些甘马等事中,都和他们共住”等等。这个道理在后面会详细说明。巴利
Pakatattehi bhikkhūhīti ettha pakatattā nāma pārājikaṃ anāpannā anukkhittā ca. Keci pana ‘‘pakatattehi bhikkhūhi ekato kattabbattāti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttattā pakatattabhūtehi alajjīhipi saddhiṃ uposathādisaṅghakammakaraṇe doso natthī’’ti vadanti, taṃ na yuttaṃ, iminā vacanena tassa atthassa asijjhanato. Yadi hi saṅghakammaṃ karīyati, pakatatteheva karīyati, na apakatattehīti evaṃ apakatattehi sahasaṃvāsapaṭikkhepaparaṃ idaṃ vacanaṃ, na pana pakatattehi sabbehi alajjīādīhi ekato saṅghakammaṃ kattabbamevāti. Evaṃ saṃvāsavidhānaparaṃ pakatattesupi sabhāgāpattiṃ āpannehi aññamaññañca alajjīhi ca saddhiṃ ekato kammakaraṇassa paṭikkhittattā. Vuttañhi ‘‘sace sabbo saṅgho sabhāgāpattiyā sati vuttavidhiṃ akatvā uposathaṃ karoti, vuttanayeneva sabbo saṅgho āpattiṃ āpajjatī’’tiādi (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. nidānavaṇṇanā). ‘‘Yattha āmisaparibhogo vaṭṭati, dhammaparibhogopi tattha vaṭṭatī’’ti alajjīhi saha paribhogo ca aṭṭhakathāyaṃ paṭikkhitto ekato kammakaraṇassāpi dhammaparibhogattā. Tasmā yathā hi pāḷiyaṃ pārājikāpattiāpajjanakapuggalaniyamatthaṃ yvāyaṃ ñatticatutthena kammena…pe… upasampanno, ayaṃ imasmiṃ atthe adhippeto bhikkhūti imasmiṃ vacane sabbepi ñatticatutthakammena upasampannā pārājikāpajjanakapuggalāyevāti niyamo na sijjhati pārājikānāpajjanakānampi sekkhādīnaṃ sambhavā, atha kho ñatticatutthakammena upasampannesuyeva pārājikāpattiāpajjanakā alajjī bālaputhujjanā labbhanti, na pana ehibhikkhuādīsūti evaṃ niyamo sijjhati, evamidhāpi pakatattesuyeva ekato kammakaraṇārahā anāpattikā lajjī kukkuccakā sikkhākāmā upalabbhanti , na apakatattesūti evameva niyamo sijjhati apakatattānaṃ gaṇapūraṇattābhāvena asaṃvāsikattaniyamato. Alajjino pana gaṇapūrakā hutvā kammassa sādhanato asaṃvāsikesu na gahitā kattabbavidhiṃ akatvā tehi saha madditvā kammaṃ karontānaṃ āpatti alajjitā ca na vigacchatīti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Eko alajjī alajjīsatampi karotī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.585) hi vuttaṃ, teneva vakkhati ‘‘sabbepi lajjino etesu kammādīsu saha vasantī’’tiādi. Ayañcattho upari vitthārato āvi bhavissati.
“如是”是在指向“以结界划定范围”等说法。大家一起礼敬、进食、入村、履行仪轨与对仪轨的应对、受持、询问、作背诵等和合行为,依世尊所制定的学处而学习,这叫做“同学”。而且应当只与有惭者同学,不应与无惭者同学——为了说明这一点,才说“所制定的……中略……名为同学”。其中,依不违犯、依受持询问等方式,应与有惭者一起学习,这些学处称为“同学”;对这些学处的共同学习,按上面所说的方式,应当由有惭者来学的状态,就叫做“同学性”——这是其意旨。在上面所说的同一甘马等事务中,无惭者没有进入有惭者的法,就与有惭者没有共住,他们只是待在外面而已——因此说“一切有惭者”等。巴利
Tathāti sīmāparicchinnehītiādiṃ parāmasati. Ekato vandanabhuñjanagāmappavesanavattāpaṭivattakaraṇauggahaparipucchāsajjhāyakaraṇādisāmaggikiriyāvasena bhagavatā paññattasikkhāpadasikkhanaṃ samasikkhatā nāma, tañca lajjīheva samaṃ sikkhitabbaṃ, na alajjīhīti dassetuṃ ‘‘paññattaṃ pana…pe… samasikkhatā nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha anatikkamanavasena uggahaparipucchādivasena ca lajjīpuggalehi samaṃ ekato sikkhitabbā samasikkhāti sikkhāpadāni vuttāni, tāsaṃ samasikkhanaṃ yathāvuttanayena lajjīhi sikkhitabbabhāvo samasikkhatā nāmāti adhippāyo. Yathāvuttesu ekakammādīsu alajjīnaṃ lajjidhamme anokkante lajjīhi saha saṃvāso natthi, tato bahiyeva te sandissantīti āha sabbepi lajjinotiādi.
56 所说的那个——这是承接关系。说“事实上并不存在”,是因为即使由黄金等做成的女人形像,在女根等部位上也有“相”的名称和说法出现,为了消除在那里犯巴拉基格的疑虑,才这样说。正因为如此,在《律事》中关于涂泥彩绘等事,对已经生起疑惑的人,说为不犯巴拉基格。巴利
56. Yaṃ taṃ vuttanti sambandho. Vatthumeva na hotīti suvaṇṇādīhi kataitthirūpānaṃ aṅgajātesupi nimittavohāradassanato tattha pārājikāsaṅkānivattanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Teneva vinītavatthūsu lepacittādivatthūsu sañjātakukkuccassa pārājikena anāpatti vuttā.
第一组四法的注释巴利
Paṭhamacatukkavaṇṇanā
57 “Assā”是动词。为了说明它的含义,说“hoti”,意思是“会有”,也就是说成“是”。在第二种义解中,“hoti”这个词是补足语。巴利
57.Assāti ākhyātapadanti tassa atthaṃ dassento ‘‘hotī’’ti āha, bhaveyyāti attho, hotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Dutiye atthavikappe ‘‘hotī’’ti idaṃ vacanaseso.
58 对于“受用者”这一说法,这里的“受用”就是指生起想要受用的心,所以说“具有受用心的人”。“敌对”是指不可意、不利的。当说“比丘的敌人、比丘的敌对者”时,后面将要说的国王的敌人等也包含在这里面,为了排除这个意思,所以只说是比丘的敌人,这是按照国王的敌人等类似的方式来显示其含义。“在那个刹那”是指在插入行为正在进行的刹那。因为从顶端到根部,插入行为正在进行的那段时间,就叫作插入刹那。“已入之时”是指男根凡是适合插入的部位,当它们全部无余进入的时候,也就是插入行为完成的那个刹那。这样进入之后,从开始拔出到中间停住的那段时间,停住的男根,它的停住或停住的状态就叫作“住”。不过在注疏中,关于女人排出精液、从一切努力完全退下来而停住的时候,说为“精液排出时”,应当知道这两种情况都取为“住”。拔出是指直至顶端,取出行为正在进行的时候,所以说“在取出时生起受用心”。巴利
58.Sādiyantassevāti ettha sādiyanaṃ nāma sevetukāmatācittassa uppādanamevāti āha ‘‘paṭisevanacittasamaṅgissā’’ti. Paṭipakkhanti aniṭṭhaṃ ahitaṃ. ‘‘Bhikkhūnaṃ paccatthikā bhikkhupaccatthikā’’ti vutte upari vuccamānā rājapaccatthikādayopi idheva pavisantīti taṃ nivattanatthaṃ bhikkhū eva paccatthikāti rājapaccatthikānurūpena attho dassito. Tasmiṃ khaṇeti pavesanakkhaṇe. Aggato hi yāva mūlā pavesanakiriyāya vattamānakālo pavesanakkhaṇo nāma. Paviṭṭhakāleti aṅgajātassa yattakaṃ ṭhānaṃ pavesanārahaṃ, tattakaṃ anavasesato paviṭṭhakāle, pavesanakiriyāya niṭṭhitakkhaṇeti attho. Evaṃ paviṭṭhassa uddharaṇārambhato antarā ṭhitakāle ṭhitaṃ aṅgajātaṃ, tassa ṭhiti vā ṭhitaṃ nāma, aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana mātugāmassa sukkavissaṭṭhiṃ patvā sabbathā vāyāmato oramitvā ṭhitakālaṃ sandhāya ‘‘sukkavissaṭṭhisamaye’’ti vuttaṃ, tadubhayampi ṭhitamevāti gahetabbaṃ. Uddharaṇaṃ nāma yāva aggā nīharaṇakiriyāya vattamānakāloti āha ‘‘nīharaṇakāle paṭisevanacittaṃ upaṭṭhāpetī’’ti.
在这里,因为当别人已经开始动作时,肢节等身体的活动确实存在,所以在受用心刚生起的那一刹那,由心生色所生起的肢节等活动,就是由这个受用心所产生的。另外,当受用心已经生起时,即使别人还没有开始动作,肢节也仍然会有活动,而这种活动也可以说就是由那个心所做的。因此,他确实会犯下由身体和心所生起的巴拉基格罪,就像“举膝圆”那条戒一样。在那条戒里也说:“若接受从腋下到膝圆之间的抚摸……乃至……按压”,仅仅接受就说是犯戒。但在比丘身触那条戒里说“应行身触”,因为是以自己的主动行为作为犯戒的标志,所以当被女人触摸时,即使存在身触的贪染以及由女人所引起的身体活动,由于没有自己的加行,就应理解为无罪。不过有些论师说:“在第一条桑喀地谢思的范围内,当被别人用暴力用手等侵犯时,也会生起解脱的快感,因此若导致不净流出,就犯桑喀地谢思;若没有流出,就只是土喇咤亚。”炭堆是指炭的堆积,或者装满炭的坑。当被女人侵犯时,不接受并不是所有人都能做到的境界,所以说“此”等。“以十一种火”是指以贪、嗔、痴、生、老、死、愁、悲、苦、忧、恼这十一种火。“他的”,是指不接受者的。“取出四集而放置”:这里因为只涉及一个人的情形,所以即使只有一个无罪的部分,也按照进入、已入、停留、取出这四个阶段,称为“四集”。“第一四集论”:这里虽然应该按照无罪部分等五个部分来说“五四集”,但因为只涉及一条途径,所以把它们合为一类,说为第一四集。因此下文才说“依三条途径,有三清净四集”等。巴利
Ettha ca yasmā parehi upakkamiyamānassa aṅgajātādikāyacalanassa vijjamānattā sevanacitte upaṭṭhitamatte tasmiṃ khaṇe cittajarūpena sañjāyamānaṃ aṅgajātādicalanaṃ iminā sevanacittena uppāditameva hoti. Apica sevanacitte uppanne parehi anupakkamiyamānassāpi aṅgajāte calanaṃ hoteva, tañca tena kataṃ nāma hoti, tasmā kāyacittato samuṭṭhitaṃ pārājikāpattiṃ so āpajjatiyeva ubbhajāṇumaṇḍalikā (pāci. 657-658) viya. Tatthāpi hi ‘‘adhakkhakaṃ ubbhajāṇumaṇḍalaṃ āmasanaṃ vā…pe… paṭipīḷanaṃ vā sādiyeyyā’’ti (pāci. 657) sādiyanamatteyeva āpatti vuttā, bhikkhuno kāyasaṃsagge pana ‘‘kāyasaṃsaggaṃ samāpajjeyyā’’ti (pārā. 270) attano upakkamassa āpattinimittabhāvena vuttattā itthiyā phusiyamānassa kāyasaṃsaggarāge ca itthiyā sañjanitakāyacalane ca vijjamānepi attano payogābhāvena anāpattiyeva vuttāti gahetabbaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘paṭhamasaṅghādisesavisayepi parehi balakkārena hatthādīhi upakkamiyamānassa mocanassādo ca uppajjati, tena ca asucimhi mutte saṅghādiseso, amutte thullaccayaṃ evā’’ti vadanti. Aṅgārakāsunti aṅgārarāsiṃ, aṅgārapuṇṇāvāṭaṃ vā. Itthiyā upakkamiyamāne asādiyanaṃ nāma na sabbesaṃ visayoti āha imañhītiādi. Ekādasahi aggīhīti rāgadosamohajātijarāmaraṇasokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsasaṅkhātehi ekādasaggīhi. Assāti asādiyantassa. Catukkaṃ nīharitvā ṭhapesīti ettha ekapuggalavisayatāya ekopi anāpattivāro pavesanapaviṭṭhaṭhitauddharaṇasaṅkhaātānaṃ catunnaṃ padānaṃ vasena ‘‘catukka’’nti vutto. Paṭhamacatukkakathāti ettha pana anāpattivārena saddhiṃ pañcannaṃ vārānaṃ vuttanayena ‘‘pañca catukkā’’ti vattabbepi ekamaggavisayatāya tesaṃ ekattaṃ āropetvā paṭhamacatukkatā vuttā. Teneva vakkhati tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ vasena tīṇi suddhikacatukkānītiādi.
二百六十九个四组论的注释巴利
Ekūnasattatidvisatacatukkakathāvaṇṇanā
59-60 “醉”是指因酒等而醉。“已被咬之相”:这里因为省略了后分,只以“已被咬”这个词来表达,所以说“已被咬之相”。“醒着”等语,因为没有修饰语,所以说“纯净四组”。“同一师长的长老”是指同一位师长门下受教的弟子。恒河对岸就是恒河彼岸。“vatare”是表示呵责含义的不变词。“如此尊重律者”:用这句话说明,对于上文优波离长老所作的判决,应当予以重视的理由。“遍取一切”是指毫无遗漏地取来整个巴拉基格的范围。如果留有馀地而制定,无惭者就会在那里找到借口,让犯行的水流继续下去,所以说“截断水流”。在“共宿”等学处,即使留有馀地而制定也是可能的,但于世所呵责的学处则不然,所以说“此”等。因为在“共宿”学处中,虽然对大部分遮蔽、大部分围绕的情况,从下限分界显示为巴吉帝亚,对一半遮蔽、一半围绕的情况显示为恶作,但因为所制还留有馀地,注疏中对大部分遮蔽、一半遮蔽等情况也一律显示为巴吉帝亚。但在这里,因为制戒毫无馀地,世尊所显示的是:凡低于大部分被咬之相者,都没有巴拉基格的范围,在那里只能得到土喇咤亚等。巴利
59-60.Mattanti surādīhi mattaṃ. Akkhāyitanimittā idha uttarapadalopena akkhāyitasaddena vuttāti āha ‘‘akkhāyitanimitta’’nti. Jāgarantintiādi visesanarahitattā ‘‘suddhikacatukkānī’’ti vuttaṃ. Samānācariyakātherāti ekācariyassa uddesantevāsikā. Gaṅgāya aparabhāgo aparagaṅgaṃ. Vatareti garahatthe nipāto. Evaṃ vinayagarukānanti iminā upari upatissattherena vuccamānavinicchayassa garukaraṇīyatāya kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Sabbaṃ pariyādiyitvāti sabbaṃ pārājikakhettaṃ anavasesato gahetvā. Yadi hi sāvasesaṃ katvā paññapeyya, alajjīnaṃ tattha lesena ajjhācārasoto pavattatīti āha ‘‘sotaṃ chinditvā’’ti. Sahaseyyādipaṇṇattivajjasikkhāpadesuyeva (pāci. 49-51) sāvasesaṃ katvāpi paññāpanaṃ sambhavati, na lokavajjesūti āha idañhītiādi. Sahaseyyasikkhāpade hi (pāci. 49 ādayo) kiñcāpi yebhuyyacchanne yebhuyyaparicchanne heṭṭhimaparicchedato pācittiyaṃ dassitaṃ, upaḍḍhacchanne upaḍḍhaparicchanne dukkaṭaṃ, tathāpi sāvasesattā paññattiyā yebhuyyacchannaupaḍḍhaparicchannādīsupi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pācittiyameva dassitaṃ. Idha pana niravasesattā paññattiyā bhagavatā dassitaṃ yebhuyyena akkhāyitanimittato heṭṭhā pārājikakkhettaṃ natthi, thullaccayādimeva tattha labbhati.
优波帝萨长老所说的这个判决,还要再举出其他支持理由,所以说了“此外”等话。为了说明:如果女根相上还剩下哪怕一点点肉条,那就算是大部分已被咬过;从此之后,如果女根相已被完全咬尽,就只有恶作罪,所以他说“从此之后没有土喇咤亚”。但这里有些人把粪道等分成四个部分,说:“越过其中两个部分,到第三部分末端为止所咬的,叫做大部分已被咬;从此之后没有土喇咤亚;到第四部分末端为止所咬的,那也只是恶作罪的事。”这种说法不对。因为“应在死尸上了知”这句话,是依据“死者大部分未被咬”等说法而说的。虽然“若相”等话是针对活人的身体说的,因为那才是主要讨论的对象。正因如此,《根本注疏》中说:“在活人身上,按所说的方式,即使连皮等也毫无剩余地完全切断”等等。“完全被咬”的意思是女根相的肉全部被切断。“相之形状”是指肉被切断后,内部直到尿囊鞘的孔状,只剩下内部皮膜那样的女根相形状,所以说“得以进入”。“而不剩丝毫相之形状”是指不剩下任何可供进入的孔状内部肉等。由此显示:只要能进入,就仍然是道。“从相上脱落的肉片”是针对脱离了女根相形状的内部肉块说的。但如果完全不破坏女根相的形态,从四周割下取出的肉片,对于死尸,像大部分未被咬的情形那样去操作的话,就仍然是巴拉基格。巴利
Upatissattherena vuttasseva vinicchayassa aññampi upatthambhakāraṇaṃ dassento apicātiādimāha. Nimitte appamattikāpi maṃsarāji sace avasiṭṭhā hoti, taṃ yebhuyyakkhāyitameva hoti, tato paraṃ pana sabbaso khāyite nimitte dukkaṭamevāti dassento āha ‘‘tato paraṃ thullaccayaṃ natthī’’ti. Keci panettha vaccamaggādiṃ cattāro koṭṭhāse katvā ‘‘tesu dve koṭṭhāse atikkamma yāva tatiyakoṭṭhāsassa pariyosānā khāyitaṃ yebhuyyakkhāyitaṃ nāma, tato paraṃ thullaccayaṃ natthi, yāva catutthakoṭṭhāsassa pariyosānā khāyitaṃ, tampi dukkaṭavatthuyevā’’ti ca vadanti, taṃ na yuttaṃ. Matasarīrasmiṃyeva veditabbanti mataṃ yebhuyyena akkhāyitantiādivacanato vuttaṃ. Yadipi nimittantiādi jīvamānakasarīrameva sandhāya vuttaṃ tasseva adhikatattā. Teneva mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanā) ‘‘jīvamānakasarīrassa vuttappakāre magge sacepi tacādīni anavasesetvā sabbaso chinne’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sabbaso khāyitanti nimittamaṃsaṃ sabbaṃ chinnanti attho. Nimittasaṇṭhānanti chinnamaṃsassa anto yāva muttavatthikosā chiddākāro abbhantarachavicammamatto itthinimittākāro, tenāha ‘‘pavesanaṃ jāyatī’’ti. Nimittasaṇṭhānaṃ pana anavasesetvāti pavesanārahachiddākārena ṭhitaabbhantaramaṃsādiṃ anavasesetvā. Etena yāva paveso labbhati, tāva maggoyevāti dasseti. Nimittato patitāya maṃsapesiyāti idaṃ nimittasaṇṭhānavirahitaṃ abbhantaramaṃsakhaṇḍaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Nimittasaṇṭhānaṃ akopetvā samantato chinditvā uddhaṭamaṃsapesiyā pana matasarīre yebhuyyena akkhāyitanimitte viya upakkamantassa pārājikameva.
像这样显示了活人身体上可能出现的情况差别之后,现在为了显示死尸上的情况,所以说“然而在死尸上”等话。“在尿囊鞘”是指男子的生殖器包皮。由于“九门大疮”等说法,人的眼、鼻等按疮口来归类,属于土喇咤亚的范围,所以对那些地方也说土喇咤亚;同样,在人的死尸上也是如此,因此说“在死的新鲜尸体”等话。其中“新鲜尸体”是针对还没腐烂的而说。“巴拉基格的范围”也兼指大部分未被咬的情况而说。“土喇咤亚的范围”也兼指被咬了一半等情况而说。在这里应当知道:在眼、鼻等土喇咤亚的范围内,即使大部分未被咬,也是土喇咤亚;在被咬了一半等情况下,则是恶作。“一切”这句话,是为了把上述象等以外其余畜生也包括进来而说。至于畜生眼、耳等疮口得恶作,应当依据注释书的标准来理解,因为经中说“以非道入非道,犯土喇咤亚”,这是笼统的说法,并没有特别限定是人类。如果只有人类的疮口才算土喇咤亚,那么对象、马等的鼻孔和尿囊鞘,以及飞虫和青蛙的口形,按疮口归类也不应该说土喇咤亚,但注释书确实这样说了。所以这里以注释书师为准。“死去的畜生们”,应理解为与死尸相关联。巴利
Evaṃ jīvamānakamanussasarīre labbhamānavisesaṃ dassetvā idāni matasarīre dassetuṃ matasarīre panātiādimāha. Vatthikosesūti purisānaṃ aṅgajātakosacammesu. ‘‘Navadvāro mahāvaṇo’’tiādi (mi. pa. 2.6.1) vacanato manussānaṃ akkhināsādīni vaṇasaṅkhepena thullaccayakkhettānīti tesupi thullaccayaṃ vuttaṃ, evaṃ manussānaṃ matasarīrepi, tenāha mate allasarīretiādi. Tattha allasarīreti akuthitaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Pārājikakkhetteti yebhuyyena akkhāyitampi sandhāya vuttaṃ. Thullaccayakkhetteti upaḍḍhakkhāyitādimpi sandhāya vuttaṃ. Ettha ca akkhināsādithullaccayakkhettesu yebhuyyena akkhāyitesupi thullaccayaṃ, upaḍḍhakkhāyitādīsu dukkaṭanti veditabbaṃ. Sabbesampīti yathāvuttahatthiādīhi aññesaṃ tiracchānānaṃ saṅgaṇhanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tiracchānagatānaṃ akkhikaṇṇavaṇesu dukkaṭaṃ pana aṭṭhakathāppamāṇena gahetabbaṃ, ‘‘amaggena amaggaṃ paveseti, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti (pārā. 66) hi sāmaññato vuttaṃ, na pana manussānanti visesetvā. Yadi hi manussānaññeva vaṇesu thullaccayaṃ siyā, hatthiassādīnaṃ nāsavatthikosesupi paṭaṅgamukhamaṇḍūkassa mukhasaṇṭhānepi ca vaṇasaṅkhepato thullaccayaṃ na vattabbaṃ siyā, vuttañca. Tasmā aṭṭhakathācariyā evettha pamāṇaṃ. Matānaṃ tiracchānagatānanti matakena sambandho.
以淫欲贪把男根放进女根鞘的人,说犯了土喇咤亚,所以论主说“不放进女根鞘”。所谓淫欲贪,是除了身触贪和泄精之乐以外,另外针对两两交合而产生的贪;这种贪也会在男人等身上生起。以这种贪在非巴拉基格的范围内侵犯女身,即使只是在不净处、在尿道等地方,也不构成桑喀地谢思,应知只按所处部位相应地构成土喇咤亚或恶作。“不放进”这句话,是用来说明:即使没有进入三道(女根、尿道、肛门)的意图,也可能因淫欲贪而在外部摩擦,因此说土喇咤亚;否则,如果是意图进入而在外部触碰,那只是淫欲的前方便,只应说恶作。“以相触相,犯土喇咤亚”——这是依据《皮革犍度》中的经文而说的:“诸比丘,不应以染心触摸男根,若触摸者,犯土喇咤亚罪。”(《大品》252)对此,大注释书为了指出某些人另有不同解释的苗头,说了“然而”等话。“针对以口触碰而说”,是指针对用唇、舌等口部器官触碰而说。“因粗重性”,是指这种违犯的严重程度。“针对那而说”,是指针对上述那段经文。那段经文是就违犯而说的,因为是依违犯的因缘而说,所以称为“针对那而说”。“善加审察”,意思是:对以下这些要好好审察——爬上对方背部的人,以男根口触碰相是有可能的;有淫欲贪的人,以男根触碰才相应;经文中并没有说“以口”;以及其他各种道理,都要尽力好好审察。桑喀地谢思,是针对人类女性而说的。尿道,这是依据《皮革犍度》的因缘部分而说的。至于另外两道,若以相口触碰,按疮口的归类,只是土喇咤亚。按上述方式,就是以淫欲贪。但若没有淫欲贪,只是以相口触碰人类女性或畜生女性的尿道,以正常口触碰,那就只是恶作,就像以正常口触碰正常口一样;否则,在那里也应当构成土喇咤亚,但那并不合理,因为犍度经中也没有那样说。以身触贪则犯恶作——若以相口或正常口等,或以其他身体,以身触贪去触碰,那就只是恶作。巴利
Methunarāgena vatthikosaṃ pavesentassa thullaccayaṃ vuttanti āha ‘‘vatthikosaṃ appavesento’’ti. Methunarāgo ca nāma kāyasaṃsaggarāgaṃ mocanassādañca muñcitvā visuṃ dvayaṃdvayasamāpattiyā rāgo, so ca purisādīsupi uppajjati, tena ca apārājikakkhette itthisarīrepi upakkamantassa asucimhi muttepi saṅghādiseso na hoti, khettānurūpaṃ thullaccayadukkaṭameva hotīti veditabbaṃ. Appavesentoti iminā tīsu maggesu pavesanādhippāye asatipi methunarāgena bahi ghaṭṭanaṃ sambhavatīti dasseti, teneva thullaccayaṃ vuttaṃ, itarathā pavesanādhippāyena bahi chupantassa methunassa pubbapayogattā dukkaṭameva vattabbaṃ siyā. Nimittena nimittaṃ chupati thullaccayanti idañca ‘‘na ca, bhikkhave, rattacittena aṅgajātaṃ chupitabbaṃ, yo chupeyya, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti (mahāva. 252) imassa cammakkhandhake āgatassa suttassa vasena vuttaṃ. Tattha ca kesañci aññathāpi atthavikappassa bījaṃ dassento mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ panātiādimāha. Mukheneva chupanaṃ sandhāyāti oṭṭhajivhādimukhāvayavena chupanaṃ sandhāya. Oḷārikattāti ajjhācārassa thullattā. Taṃ sandhāyabhāsitanti taṃ yathāvuttasuttaṃ. Suttañhi ajjhācāraṃ sandhāya paṭicca vuttattā ‘‘sandhāyabhāsita’’nti vuccati. Suṭṭhusallakkhetvāti piṭṭhiṃ abhiruhantānaṃ aṅgajātamukheneva nimittachupanassa sambhavaṃ methunarāgīnañca aṅgajātena chupanasseva anurūpatañca sutte ca ‘‘mukhenā’’ti avuttatañca aññañca nayaṃ yathābalaṃ suṭṭhu sallakkhetvāti attho. Saṅghādisesoti manussitthiṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Passāvamagganti idaṃ cammakkhandhake nidānavasena vuttaṃ. Itaramaggadvayaṃ pana nimittamukhena chupantassa vaṇasaṅkhepena thullaccayameva. Vuttanayenevāti methunarāgeneva. Nimittamukhena pana vinā methunarāgena manussitthiyā vā tiracchānagatitthiyā vā passāvamaggaṃ pakatimukhena chupantassa dukkaṭameva pakatimukhena pakatimukhachupane viya, itarathā tatthāpi thullaccayena bhavitabbaṃ, tañca na yuttaṃ khandhakasuttepi tathā avuttattā. Kāyasaṃsaggarāgena dukkaṭanti nimittamukhena vā pakatimukhādiṃ itarakāyena vā kāyasaṃsaggarāgena chupantassa dukkaṭameva.
这里又有一个问题:如果有人因为身相触的贪欲,对外的对象发起行动,而他自己并不知道,男根如果碰到了巴拉基格的范畴,那会怎样?有些论师说:“因为没有淫欲贪,如果对象是人类女性,就犯桑喀地谢思;对其余对象,则依具体对象犯土喇咤亚和恶作。”另一些论师则说:“在进入的刹那,因为有可能对触感产生领受,所以就像被强力侵犯的刹那一样,仍然是巴拉基格。”这个说法更合理。因为只有在三道以外的其他部位,才根据身触贪等贪的种类不同而有不同的罪;在三道中则不是这样。在三道中,无论以什么方式,在领受触感的刹那,就是巴拉基格。正因如此,对于他人侵犯时的进入等情形,不再去分析贪的种类,仅凭领受这一点,就说犯巴拉基格。巴利
Ettha ca kāyasaṃsaggarāgena bahinimitte upakkamato ajānantasseva aṅgajātaṃ yadi pārājikakkhettaṃ chupati, tattha kiṃ hotīti? Keci tāva ‘‘methunarāgassa abhāvā manussitthiyā saṅghādiseso, sesesu vatthuvasena thullaccayadukkaṭānī’’ti vadanti. Aññe pana ‘‘pavesanakkhaṇe phassassa sādiyanasambhavato balakkārena upakkamanakkhaṇe viya pārājikamevā’’ti vadanti, idameva yuttataraṃ. Maggattayato hi aññasmiṃ padeseyeva kāyasaṃsaggādirāgabhedato āpattibhedo labbhati, na maggattaye. Tattha pana yena kenaci ākārena phassassa sādiyanakkhaṇe pārājikameva, teneva paropakkamena pavesanādīsu rāgabhedaṃ anuddharitvā sādiyanamattena pārājikaṃ vuttaṃ.
敷具四法分别的注释巴利
Santhatacatukkabhedakathāvaṇṇanā
61-2 “已行道者”,是指已经开始修观的人。“已执取”,是就身根来说的。“以已执取而触”,应当理解为以已执取的身体被触,这里要按业格的意义来理解。或者也可以这样理解:这样做的比丘,不以任何已执取的东西去触任何已执取的东西。“将安立借口”,就是将要安立借口、加以构想,这是它的意思。“以铺物等差别而区分”,就是用铺物等限定语加以区别。“铺物”,是以部分之名来指称整体,就像说“烧破布的洞”这类说法一样。比如,布的一部分从布的层面被说成“烧破”,把这种以部分来指称的说法,转用到作为整体的布上,然后再把那整体与名为烧破处的洞联系起来,就说成“烧破布的洞”。同样,这里也是把女性之道的部分之名,转用到作为整体的女性上,再把那女性当作与铺物之道相关联,于是说“铺物女性之粪道”等等。不过,《萨拉他迪帕尼》(《萨拉他》复注·巴拉基格篇2.61-62)在这里说“以部分称谓整体”,这种说法并不合理,因为明显是以支分的称谓来理解整体。否则,“铺物女性之粪道”就不会有阴性词形以及与道的关联;而把整体转指部分时,其义就只指部分,比如“树枝被砍时,树被砍”等例子那样。巴利
61-2.Paṭipannakassāti āraddhavipassakassa. Upādinnakanti kāyindriyaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Upādinnakena phusatīti upādinnakasarīrena phusīyatīti kammasādhanena attho daṭṭhabbo. Atha vā evaṃ karonto bhikkhu kiñci upādinnakaṃ upādinnakena na phusatīti attho. Lesaṃ oḍḍessantīti lesaṃ ṭhapessanti, parikappessantīti attho. Santhatādibhedehi bhinditvāti santhatādivisesanehi visesetvā. Santhatāyāti samudāye ekadesavohāro daḍḍhassa paṭassa chiddantiādīsu viya. Yathā hi paṭassa ekadesova vatthato daḍḍhoti vuccati, taṃ ekadesavohāraṃ samudāye paṭe upacārato āropetvā puna taṃ samudāyaṃ daḍḍhappadesasaṅkhātachiddasambandhībhāvena ‘‘daḍḍhassa paṭassa chidda’’nti voharanti, evamidhāpi itthiyā maggappadesavohāraṃ samudāyabhūtāya itthiyā āropetvā puna taṃ itthiṃ santhatamaggasambandhiniṃ katvā santhatāya itthiyā vaccamaggenātiādi vuttaṃ. Sāratthadīpaniyaṃ (sārattha. ṭī. pārājikakaṇḍa 2.61-62) panettha ‘‘ekadese samudāyavohāro’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ na yuttaṃ avayavavohārena samudāyasseva patīyamānattā. Itarathā hi santhatāya vaccamaggenāti itthiliṅgatā maggasambandhitā ca na siyā, ekadese samudāyopacārassa pana ekadesova attho sākhāya chijjamānāya rukkho chijjatītiādīsu viya.
没有把布等物插进生殖器里面,只说在外面缠裹,所以叫做“缠裹”。所谓“比丘也叫作铺物者”等等,是就整体而借用部分来说的。所谓“进入多少”,就是进入芝麻粒那么大。即使眼、鼻等孔窍被铺盖住,也还是按照各自所在部位来判罪,所以说“在土喇咤亚范围内就是土喇咤亚”等等。所谓“碰到木桩的,恶作”,是说把木桩插进女根相内,让它平齐或者凸出来立着,如果男根碰到它,碰的人就犯恶作,因为没有插进去。但如果稍微插进里面的空隙中立着,男根碰到没有已执取的木桩头部,那就是巴拉基格。所谓“它的底”,是指竹筒、芦苇筒等的内底。所谓“外面的木桩”,是指插进里面的竹节等物露在外面的头部。所谓“正如在女根等处”,意思是:就像在女人的小便道等处所说的那样,用木桩去碰等等,在一切大便道等处也应当这样理解其判定标准。巴利
Vatthādīni maggassa anto appavesetvā bahiyeva veṭhanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘paliveṭhetvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Samudāye avayavūpacāreneva bhikkhupi santhato nāmātiādi vuttaṃ. Yattake paviṭṭheti tilabījamatte paviṭṭhe. Akkhināsādīnaṃ santhatattepi yathāvatthukamevāti āha thullaccayakkhette thullaccayantiādi. Khāṇuṃ ghaṭṭentassa dukkaṭanti itthinimittassa anto khāṇuṃ pavesetvā samatalaṃ, atirittaṃ vā ṭhitaṃ khāṇuṃ sace ghaṭṭeti, ghaṭṭentassa dukkaṭaṃ pavesābhāvato. Sace pana īsakaṃ anto allokāse pavesetvā ṭhitaṃ anupādinnameva khāṇusīsaṃ aṅgajātena chupati, pārājikameva. Tassa talanti veḷunaḷādikassa antotalaṃ. Bahiddhā khāṇuketi anto pavesitaveḷupabbādikassa bahi nikkhantasīsaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yathā ca itthinimittetiādīsu yathā itthiyā passāvamagge khāṇuṃ katvā ghaṭṭanādikaṃ vuttaṃ, evaṃ sabbattha vaccamaggādīsupi lakkhaṇaṃ veditabbanti attho.
王敌等四类分别的注释巴利
Rājapaccatthikādicatukkabhedakathāvaṇṇanā
65 所谓“诡诈者”,就是骗子。先只举出耽于女色者,现在为了把其余各类耽于放逸者也一并包括进来,所以说道“耽于女色者、耽于酒者等”。巴利
65.Kerāṭikāti vañcakā. Paṭhamaṃ itthidhuttameva dassetvā idāni itaradhuttepi saṅgahetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘itthidhuttasurādhuttādayo vā’’ti vuttaṃ.
犯与不犯分别的注释巴利
Āpattānāpattivāravaṇṇanā
66 没有作出承认,因为享受欲望和道与道的修行这两支已经具备。但对于被玷污的人,仅凭道和道的修行这一支就已具备,而被称为“享受欲望”的接受这一支并不具备。因此应当询问他,当他承认“接受了”时,就依据这个承认将他驱摈。所谓“就在那里”,就是指在毗舍离的大林里。所谓“遍及全身”,就是遍及整个身体。由于经文说“如血”,应当理解为在无头发等的一切部位都有。所谓“常时疯狂”,是针对那种胆汁从胆囊涌出、始终向外流的人说的。但如果某人的胆汁虽然涌动,却仍留在胆囊内,或者有时流出、有时又再流出,那么要知道这种人也会间或恢复神志,并且能通过药物恢复正常的健康。巴利
66. Paṭiññātakaraṇaṃ natthi sevetukāmatā maggena maggappaṭipattīti dvinnaṃ aṅgānaṃ siddhattā. Dūsitassa pana maggena maggappaṭipatti evamekaṃ aṅgaṃ siddhaṃ, sevetukāmatāsaṅkhātaṃ sādiyanaṃ asiddhaṃ. Tasmā so pucchitvā ‘‘sādiyi’’nti vuttapaṭiññāya nāsetabbo. Tatthevāti vesāliyaṃ mahāvane eva. Sabbaṅgagatanti sabbakāyagataṃ. ‘‘Lohitaṃ viyā’’ti vuttattā kesādīnaṃ vinimuttaṭṭhāne sabbatthāti gahetabbaṃ. Niccameva ummattako hotīti yassa pittakosato pittaṃ calitvā sabbadā bahi nikkhantaṃ hoti, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yassa pana pittaṃ calitvā pittakoseyeva ṭhitaṃ hoti, kadāci vā nikkhantaṃ puna nikkhamati, sopi antarantarā saññaṃ paṭilabhati bhesajjena ca pakatiārogyaṃ paṭilabhatīti veditabbaṃ.
杂论的注释巴利
Pakiṇṇakakathāvaṇṇanā
“杂”是指混合的方式。“生起”是指产生的原因。“作”等词只是举例,因为从总摄的角度来看,也包含“无作”等在内。应当这样连接理解:“与受俱行的善也应了知。”“依一切总摄的方式”,是指依照总摄一切学处的方式,而说“身、语、身语、身心、语心、身语心”,这六种就是犯的生起。生起等确实是就犯本身而说的,不是就学处而说的。不过,为了确定各个学处所限定的犯,才以学处为标题来讲述生起等。这样便能识别犯的差别,因为“犯”这个词通于一切犯;然而在这六种生起中,前三种是无心的,后三种是有心的。总之,了知这“杂”之后应当理解,这就是连接。有这六种生起故为“六生起”。其余诸项也是如此。巴利
Pakiṇṇakanti vomissakanayaṃ. Samuṭṭhānanti uppattikāraṇaṃ. Kiriyātiādi nidassanamattaṃ akiriyādīnampi saṅgahato. Vedanāya saha kusalañca veditabbanti yojetabbaṃ. Sabbasaṅgāhakavasenāti sabbesaṃ sikkhāpadānaṃ saṅgāhakavasena ‘‘kāyo vācā kāyavācā kāyacittaṃ vācācittaṃ kāyavācācitta’’nti evaṃ vuttāni cha āpattisamuṭṭhānāni. Samuṭṭhānādayo hi āpattiyā eva honti, na sikkhāpadassa. Taṃtaṃsikkhāpadassa niyataāpattiyā eva gahaṇatthaṃ pana sikkhāpadasīsena samuṭṭhānādīnaṃ kathanaṃ. Evañhi āpattiviseso paññāyati āpatti-saddassa sabbāpattisādhāraṇattā, imesu pana chasu samuṭṭhānesu purimāni tīṇi acittakāni, pacchimāni sacittakāni. Samāsato taṃ imaṃ pakiṇṇakaṃ viditvā veditabbanti sambandho. Cha samuṭṭhānāni etassāti chasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Evaṃ sesesupi.
“有咖提那生起”等这一句,是依照生起项目来显示两种生起和一种生起。确实有十三种生起项目:第一巴拉基格生起、不与取生起、传信生起、共住劝告生起、咖提那生起、羊毛生起、洗足法生起、道路生起、盗贼队生起、说法生起、宣称上人法生起、令贼女受具足戒生起、未允许生起。其中,“有六种生起”这句话是针对传信生起说的;因为没有五种生起的情况,所以不说“有五种生起”,而说“有四种生起”,这就涵盖了道路生起和未允许生起。凡是以第一、第三、第四、第六种生起而生起的,这是道路生起。凡是以第二、第三、第五、第六种生起而生起的,这是未允许生起。“有三种生起”这句话涵盖了不与取生起和宣称上人法生起。凡是以有心的三种生起而生起的,这是不与取生起。凡是以无心的三种生起而生起的,这是宣称上人法生起。而通过“有咖提那生起”等语句,则依照其余的生起项目来涵盖两种生起和一种生起。其中,凡是以第三、第六种生起而生起的,名为咖提那生起。凡是以第一、第四种生起而生起的,这是羊毛生起。凡是仅以第六种生起而生起的,这是卸担生起,“共住劝告生起”也是它的名称。这样就具体显示了八种犯的项目。而通过“等”这个字,在这里还涵盖了其余的第一巴拉基格生起、洗足法生起、盗贼队生起、说法生起、令贼女受具足戒生起这五种生起项目。其中,凡是依身和心而生起的,这是第一巴拉基格生起。凡是以第二、第五种生起而生起的,这是洗足法生起。凡是以第四、第六种生起而生起的,这是盗贼队生起。凡是仅以第五种生起而生起的,这是说法生起。凡是以第五、第六种生起而生起的,这是令贼女受具足戒生起。在这里,后面三种有心的生起,按每一种生起各别来看,一种生起各有三种。而两种生起则应当知道,依照第一和第四、或第二和第五、或第三和第六、或第四和第六、或第五和第六种生起的组合方式,共有五种。巴利
Atthi kathinasamuṭṭhānantiādi samuṭṭhānasīsavasena dvisamuṭṭhānaekasamuṭṭhānānaṃ dassanaṃ. Terasa hi samuṭṭhānasīsāni paṭhamapārājikasamuṭṭhānaṃ adinnādānasamuṭṭhānaṃ sañcarittasamuṭṭhānaṃ samanubhāsanasamuṭṭhānaṃ kathinasamuṭṭhānaṃ eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ padasodhammasamuṭṭhānaṃ addhānasamuṭṭhānaṃ theyyasatthasamuṭṭhānaṃ dhammadesanāsamuṭṭhānaṃ bhūtārocanasamuṭṭhānaṃ corīvuṭṭhāpanasamuṭṭhānaṃ ananuññātasamauṭṭhānanti. Tattha atthi chasamuṭṭhānanti iminā sañcarittasamuṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ, pañcasamuṭṭhānassa abhāvato ‘‘atthi pañcasamuṭṭhāna’’nti avatvā ‘‘atthi catusamuṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ, iminā ca addhānasamuṭṭhānaṃ ananuññātasamuṭṭhānañca saṅgahitaṃ. Yañhi paṭhamatatiyacatutthachaṭṭhehi samuṭṭhānehi samuṭṭhāti , idaṃ addhānasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Yaṃ pana dutiyatatiyapañcamachaṭṭhehi samuṭṭhāti, idaṃ ananuññātasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Atthi tisamuṭṭhānanti iminā adinnādānasamuṭṭhānaṃ bhūtārocanasamuṭṭhānañca saṅgahitaṃ. Yañhi sacittakehi tīhi samuṭṭhāti, idaṃ adinnādānasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Yaṃ pana acittakehi tīhi samuṭṭhāti, idaṃ bhūtārocanasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Atthi kathinasamuṭṭhānantiādinā pana avasesasamauṭṭhānasīsavasena dvisamuṭṭhānaṃ ekasamuṭṭhānañca saṅgaṇhāti. Tattha hi yaṃ tatiyachaṭṭhehi samuṭṭhāti, idaṃ kathinasamuṭṭhānaṃ nāma. Yaṃ pana paṭhamacatutthehi samuṭṭhāti, idaṃ eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Yaṃ chaṭṭheneva samuṭṭhāti, idaṃ dhuranikkhepasamuṭṭhānaṃ, ‘‘samanubhāsanasamauṭṭhāna’’ntipi tasseva nāmaṃ. Iti sarūpena aṭṭha āpattisīsāni dassitāni. Ādisaddena panettha avasesāni paṭhamapārājikasamuṭṭhānapadasodhammatheyyasatthadhammadesanācorīvuṭṭhāpanasamuṭṭhānāni pañcapi samuṭṭhānasīsāni saṅgahitāni. Tattha yaṃ kāyacittato samuṭṭhāti, idaṃ paṭhamapārājikasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Yaṃ dutiyapañcamehi samuṭṭhāti, idaṃ padasodhammasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Yaṃ catutthachaṭṭhehi samuṭṭhāti, idaṃ theyyasatthasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Yaṃ pañcameneva samuṭṭhāti, idaṃ dhammadesanāsamauṭṭhānaṃ. Yaṃ pañcamachaṭṭhehi samuṭṭhāti, idaṃ corīvuṭṭhāpanasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Ettha ca pacchimesu tīsu sacittakasamuṭṭhānesu ekekasamuṭṭhānavasena ekasamuṭṭhānāni tividhāni. Dvisamuṭṭhānāni pana paṭhamacatutthehi vā dutiyapañcamehi vā tatiyachaṭṭhehi vā catutthachaṭṭhehi vā pañcamachaṭṭhehi vā samuṭṭhānavasena pañcavidhānīti veditabbāni.
像这样,按照生起方式把一切学处显示为十三种之后,现在为了再按照“作”的方式显示为五种,所以说了“在这里也”等话。“某”就是指学处。从“作”来说,比如掘地等,是从身表、语表所产生的业。从“无作”来说,比如第一咖提那等,仅仅是因为该做的没有做。从“作无作”来说,比如从非亲属比丘尼手中接受衣等。有的从“作”,有的从“无作”,比如接受金银等;有的从“作”,有的从“作无作”,比如建造小屋等。“因为没有违犯想而有解脱”,应当理解为省略了中间词的“想解脱”复合词。“得心支”,是因为只从有心生起而生起。“其余”,是指没有心支这种决定。这种想二法,是从无犯的角度说的;从犯的角度说,则是有心的二法。只有这一点差别,意义上是一样的。巴利
Evaṃ samuṭṭhānavasena sabbasikkhāpadāni terasadhā dassetvā idāni kiriyāvasena pañcadhā dassetuṃ tatrāpītiādi vuttaṃ. Kiñcīti sikkhāpadaṃ. Kiriyatoti pathavīkhaṇanādi (pāci. 84-85) viya kāyavacīviññattijanitakammato. Akiriyatoti paṭhamakathinādi (pārā. 459 ādayo) viya kattabbassa akaraṇeneva. Kiriyākiriyatoti aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā hatthato cīvarapaṭiggahaṇādi (pārā. 508 ādayo) viya. Siyā kiriyato, siyā akiriyato rūpiyapaṭiggahaṇādi (pārā. 582 ādayo) viya, siyā kiriyato, siyā kiriyākiriyato kuṭikārādi (pārā. 342) viya. Vītikkamasaññāya abhāvena vimokkho assāti saññāvimokkhanti majjhepadalopīsamāso daṭṭhabbo. Cittaṅgaṃ labhati sacittakasamuṭṭhāneheva samuṭṭhahanato. Itaranti yassa cittaṅganiyamo natthi, taṃ, anāpattimukhena cetaṃ saññādukaṃ vuttaṃ, āpattimukhena sacittakadukanti ettakameva viseso, atthato samānāva.
通过身门和语门所犯的罪,也被归入身业或语业之中。其中,按照多数情况来说,就像不与取、妄语等那样,所以只说身业和语业这一对;但如果加以分别,则与身业、语业合在一起就成为三类。正因如此,在《论母注》(《疑惑度脱注·初巴拉基格注释》)中说:“一切依身业、语业及二者之方式,成为三种。”也正因如此,这里在不与取等(《巴拉基格》89)中,也以身业、语业即二者之方式加以显示。然而,“有学处是善”等说法,是就引生罪的心而言,以因代果的方式来说的,并不是说罪本身在究竟意义上具有善等法的自性,因为罪是假名施设的性质。世尊确实是依于善、不善等究竟法而施设罪的假名。因为下文将会说:“凡以善心而犯者,那是善”等(《巴拉基格注》1.66 杂论)。依于世尊的教令而成立的罪,并不具有善等究竟自性,否则未受具戒者和最初犯戒者也会有罪的过失,而且该罪也无法通过发露等而清净。因为,如果罪是以因缘之力而生起的善等自性,它就不会在未受具戒者等人身上不产生,而且一旦生起,也不可能由任何东西使其灭坏。虽然有“罪由自性灭坏以及通过发露等而消失”的说法,但并不是说由此而使不善等消失。因为,以杀父等业而犯巴拉基格的比丘,取在家相、舍弃比丘身份时,巴拉基格罪就消失了,但杀生等不善并不消失,因为它具有无间业等的性质。因此应当知道:世尊为了折伏无惭无愧者等,出于制戒十义(《巴拉基格》39;《附随》2),依于随缘而生起的善、不善等名色诸法而施设的,只是假名的罪;而此罪通过如法出罪甘马,才名为消失。因此他说:“引生罪的心确实只有三十二种”等。正是由于具有引生罪的性质,这里善等与罪的差别才得以成立。因为,由彼所引生者,若与彼无差别,则不合理,会导致引生者与被引生者的差别言说被切断的过失。然而,在《心义光明》(《心义光明复注·巴拉基格品》2.66 杂论注释)中,为了在善心引生罪的刹那,也能以罪具有色无记的性质来成立“罪在究竟意义上不可能具有善性——根据‘罪之诤事或是不善,或是无记,没有罪之诤事是善’的说法,以及‘罪可能具有不善性和无记性’的认识”,而依据“凡以善心犯者,彼为善;以其余心犯者,彼为其余”(《巴拉基格注》1.66 杂论)这一注疏文,说道:“‘凡以善心犯者’,即具足善心者犯下以学处为首所摄的罪,但通过此语而称该罪为善,其善性是就譬喻说,并非就究竟义说,此即显示。因为,以善心犯罪者,是犯下包含有表与无表、以违越学处的方式而转起的、摄于色蕴的无记罪。”其中,针对“凡以善心犯者”这句话,说了“但通过此语而称该罪为善,其善性是就譬喻说,并非就究竟义说,此即显示”;同样地,对于“以其余心犯者,彼为其余”这句话,由于它表达了“凡以不善心犯者,彼为不善;凡以无记心犯者,彼为无记”的意思,因此针对“其余”一词,也应当说:“通过此语而称该罪为不善、为无记,也是就譬喻说。”没有这样说,而只在善的方面加以论述,我们看不出理由。至于所引以为据的“罪之诤事或是不善”等语,那也不是有效的理由,因为“凡以不善心犯者,彼为不善”等,依前文所述方式,其不善等性也是就譬喻说;而且,由于以善来称呼罪是不合理的,所以说“没有罪之诤事是善”。因为,罪即使由善心引生,由于是被世尊所禁止的有过患之法,即使以因代果的方式,以无过患的善来称呼也是不合理的,因为有过患与无过患是相互矛盾的。如同虚空等假名谛,若以生、老、坏等来称呼其“已生”等,从无安住等道理来说是不合理的;同样,这里以善来称呼也是不合理的,因为相矛盾。然而,以不善等来称呼则是合理的,因为以因代果的方式,不善等自性可以避免如前所述的过失。对于经典,也应如此理解其义,使之不与经、随顺经等相矛盾。巴利
Kāyavacīdvārehi āpajjitabbampi kāyakamme vā vacīkamme vā saṅgayhati. Tattha bāhullavuttito adinnādānamusāvādādayo viyāti atthi sikkhāpadaṃ kāyakammantiādinā kāyakammaṃ vacīkammañcāti dukameva vuttaṃ, vibhāgato pana kāyavacīkammena saddhiṃ tikameva hoti. Teneva mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanā) vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbā ca kāyakammavacīkammatadubhayavasena tividhā hontī’’ti. Tatoyeva idhāpi adinnādānādīsu (pārā. 89) kāyakammavacīkammanti tadubhayavasena dassitaṃ. Atthi pana sikkhāpadaṃ kusalantiādi āpattisamuṭṭhāpakacittavasena kāriye kāraṇopacārena vuttaṃ, na pana āpattiyā kusalādiparamatthadhammatāvasena āpattiyā sammutisabhāvattā. Kusalākusalādiparamatthadhamme upādāya hi bhagavatā āpattisammuti paññattā. Vakkhati hi ‘‘yaṃ kusalacittena āpajjati, taṃ kusala’’ntiādi (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.66 pakaṇṇakakathā). Na hi bhagavato āṇāyattā āpatti kusalādiparamatthasabhāvā hoti anupasampannānaṃ ādikammikānañca āpattippasaṅgato, tassā desanādīhi visuddhiabhāvappasaṅgato ca. Na hi kāraṇabalena uppajjamānā kusalādisabhāvā āpatti anupasampannādīsu nivattati, uppannāya ca tassā kenaci vināso na sambhavati. Sarasavināsato desanādinā ca āpatti vigacchatīti vacanamatthi, na pana tena akusalādi vigacchati. Pitughātādikammena hi pārājikaṃ āpannassa bhikkhuno gihiliṅgaṃ gahetvā bhikkhubhāvapariccāgena pārājikāpatti vigacchati, na pāṇātipātādiakusalaṃ ānantariyādibhāvato. Tasmā dummaṅkūnaṃ niggahādidasaatthavase (pārā. 39; pari. 2) paṭicca bhagavatā yathāpaccayaṃ samuppajjamāne kusalākusalādināmarūpadhamme upādāya paññattā sammutiyeva āpatti, sā ca yathāvidhipaṭikammakaraṇena vigatā nāma hotīti veditabbaṃ, tenāha dvattiṃseva hi āpattisamuṭṭhāpakacittānītiādi. Āpattisamuṭṭhāpakatteneva hettha kusalādīnaṃ āpattito bhedo siddho. Na hi taṃsamuṭṭhitassa tato abhedo yutto samuṭṭhānasamuṭṭhitabhedabyavahārupacchedappasaṅgato. Sāratthadīpaniyaṃ (sārattha. ṭī. pārājikakaṇḍa 2.66 pakiṇṇakakathāvaṇṇanā) pana āpattiyā paramatthato kusalattameva na sambhavati ‘‘āpattādhikaraṇaṃ siyā akusalaṃ, siyā abyākataṃ, natthi āpattādhikaraṇaṃ kusala’’nti vacanato, ‘‘akusalattaṃ pana abyākatattañca āpattiyā sambhavatī’’ti saññāya kusalacittasamuṭṭhānakkhaṇepi rūpābyākatattaṃ āpattiyā samatthetuṃ yaṃ kusalacittena āpajjati, taṃ kusalaṃ, itarehi itaranti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.66 pakiṇṇakakathā) imaṃ aṭṭhakathāvacanaṃ nissāya vuttaṃ ‘‘yaṃ kusalacittena āpajjatīti yaṃ sikkhāpadasīse gahitaṃ āpattiṃ kusalacittasamaṅgī āpajjati, iminā pana vacanena taṃ kusalanti āpattiyā vuccamāno kusalabhāvo pariyāyato, na paramatthatoti dasseti. Kusalacittena hi āpattiṃ āpajjanto saviññattikaṃ aviññattikaṃ vā sikkhāpadavītikkamākārappavattaṃ rūpakkhandhasaṅkhātaṃ abyākatāpattiṃ āpajjatī’’ti. Tattha yaṃ kusalacittena āpajjatīti imaṃ vacanaṃ uddissa ‘‘iminā pana vacanena taṃ kusalanti āpattiyā vuccamāno kusalabhāvo pariyāyato, na paramatthatoti dassetī’’ti vuttaṃ, evaṃ itarehi itaranti vacanena ‘‘yaṃ akusalacittena āpajjahi, taṃ akusalaṃ, yaṃ abyākatacittena āpajjati, taṃ abyākata’’nti imassa atthassa vuttattā itarehīti vacanaṃ uddissa ‘‘imināpi vacanena itaranti āpattiyā vuccamāno akusalabhāvo abyākatabhāvo ca pariyāyato dassetī’’ti vattabbaṃ. Evaṃ avatvā kusalapakkhe eva kathanassa kāraṇaṃ na passāma. Yaṃ pana āpattādhikaraṇaṃ siyā akusalantiādivacanaṃ kāraṇattena vuttaṃ, tampi akāraṇaṃ yaṃ akusalacittena āpajjati, taṃ akusalantiādinā heṭṭhā vuttanayena akusalādibhāvassa pariyāyadesitattā, āpattiyā kusalavohārassa ayuttatāya natthi āpattādhikaraṇaṃ kusalanti vuttattā ca. Āpattiyā hi kusalacittasamuṭṭhitattepi bhagavatā paṭikkhittabhāvena sāvajjadhammattā kāraṇūpacārenāpi anavajjakusalavohāro na yutto sāvajjānavajjānaṃ aññamaññaviruddhattā. Yathā ākāsādisammutisaccānaṃ uppannatādivohāro viya jātijarābhaṅgānaṃ uppannatādivohāro anavaṭṭhānādidesato ayutto, evamidhāpi kusalavohāro ayutto viruddhattā. Akusalādivohāro pana yutto , kāraṇūpacārena pana akusalādisabhāvatā yathāvuttadosānativattanato. Suttassāpi hi yathā suttasuttānulomādīhi virodho na hoti, tatheva attho gahetabbo.
再说,所谓“以善心而犯……就是犯下称为色蕴的无记罪”这种说法,本身就不合理。因为色蕴是刹那生灭的,这样一来,罪在没有经过发露等对治的情况下,就会自然消失。那如果说“色的相续本身就是罪”呢?这也不对,因为即使做了对治,罪也不会消失。色的相续并不会因为发露等而消失,因为它依赖自己的因缘。所以,无论从哪方面说,罪在究竟意义上成立都不合理。由此也应知道,所谓“躺卧后入灭尽定的人,以同床共宿为缘,这样生起的色法本身就是罪”等说法,也已被破除。不过在这里,入灭尽定者的罪,因为是只依色法而生起,所以是无心、无受的;在其他情况下,则是有心、有受的;但无论在哪种情况下,都应知道罪的性质是假名施设。正因如此,在《故犯学处》的注释中,为了否定他人所主张的罪具有不善等性质,就亲自说:“由于对最初犯者说无罪……乃至……应知‘罪之诤事’只是施设。”所以,“依于各种善等法的生起,由世尊制定的‘罪’的世俗称谓便产生”、“在止息之因存在期间,它持续存在”、“由止息之因而灭去”,这些都是世俗的说法。应当知道,罪的体性虽然是世俗施设,但对于故意犯这种罪的人,以及不做对治、心怀轻慢的人,就会积集不善之聚,并成为往生善趣与圣道的障碍,因此有惭愧的人不会违越如法的规定;而由于不违越,他们无量差别的戒等诸法便得以增长,应这样理解。“唯三十二”这一限定,是就作为罪相的身表、语表仅由这三十二种心生起而说的,并不是说一切罪都只由这些心生起。因为对于躺下入睡的人,以及入于禅那、灭尽定的人来说,其同床共宿等罪,是由不产生表业的异熟心、安止心以及色法而生起的。巴利
Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ ‘‘kusalacittena hi āpattiṃ āpajjanto…pe… rūpakkhandhasaṅkhātaṃ abyākatāpattiṃ āpajjatī’’ti, taṃ ayuttameva rūpakkhandhassa khaṇikatāya āpattiyāpi desanādipaṭikammaṃ vināva paṭipassaddhippasaṅgato. Rūpaparamparā āpattīti ce? Tanna, paṭikammenāpi avigamappasaṅgato. Na hi rūpasantatidesanādīhi vigacchati sakāraṇāyattattā, iti sabbathā āpattiyā paramatthatā ayuttā, eteneva yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘nipajjitvā nirodhasamāpannassa sahaseyyavasena tathākārappavattarūpadhammasseva āpattibhāvato’’tiādi, tampi paṭisiddhanti veditabbaṃ. Idha pana nirodhasamāpannānaṃ rūpadhammameva paṭicca uppannattā āpatti acittā avedanā, aññattha pana sacittā savedanāva, sabbatthāpi paññattisabhāvāti veditabbā. Teneva duṭṭhadosasikkhāpadaṭṭhakathāyaṃ āpattiyā akusalādisabhāvaṃ paraparikappitaṃ nisedhetuṃ ‘‘ādikammikassa anāpattivacanato…pe… paṇṇattimattameva āpattādhikaraṇanti veditabba’’nti sayameva vakkhati, tasmā ‘‘taṃtaṃkusalādidhammasamuppattiyā bhagavatā paññattā āpattisammuti samuṭṭhitā’’ti ca, ‘‘yāva paṭippassaddhikāraṇā tiṭṭhatī’’ti ca, ‘‘paṭippassaddhikāraṇehi vinassatī’’ti ca voharīyati. Āpattiyā ca sammutisabhāvattepi hi sañcicca taṃ āpajjantassa, paṭikiriyaṃ akarontassa ca anādare akusalarāsi ceva saggamaggantarāyo ca hotīti lajjino yathāvidhiṃ nātikkamanti, anatikkamanappaccayā ca tesaṃ anantappabhedā sīlādayo dhammā parivaḍḍhantīti gahetabbaṃ. Dvattiṃsevāti niyamo āpattinimittānaṃ kāyavacīviññattīnaṃ eteheva samuppajjanato kato, na pana sabbāpattīnampi eteheva samuppajjanato. Nipajjitvā niddāyantānañhi jhānanirodhasamāpannānañca aviññattijanakehi vipākaappanācittehi ceva rūpadhammehi ca sahaseyyādiāpatti sambhavati.
“十”是指八种大唯作心,再加上两种唯作无因意识界。应当知道:在不了知施设的情况下,于变现神变等事中,神通可以作为犯戒的等起。在这里,有些学处只是以不善心为等起,有些则依善和无记而有两种心,有些则有三种心——能得到的差别就只有这些,没有别的。关于“唯作等起”,是说由他人加行而生起的身体器官等动摇,当被称为受用心或随顺心的心识生起时,就是由那个心所等起的;否则,就应该说“或者是唯作等起,或者不是唯作等起”。巴利
Dasāti kiriyāhetukamanoviññāṇadhātudvayena saha aṭṭha mahākiriyacittāni. Paññattiṃ ajānitvā iddhivikubbanādīsu abhiññānaṃ āpattisamuṭṭhāpakattaṃ veditabbaṃ. Ettha ca kiñci sikkhāpadaṃ akusalacittameva, kiñci kusalābyākatavasena dvicittaṃ, kiñci ticittanti ayameva bhedo labbhati, nāññoti veditabbaṃ. Kiriyāsamuṭṭhānanti parūpakkamena jāyamānaṃ aṅgajātādicalanaṃ sādiyanacittasaṅkhāte sevanacitte uppanne tena cittena samuppāditameva hotīti vuttaṃ itarathā ‘‘siyā kiriyasamuṭṭhānaṃ, siyā akiriyasamuṭṭhāna’’nti vattabbato.
《心义灯》里说:“所谓‘唯作等起’,这是就大多数情况而说的,因为当他人主动上前时,随顺接受的人其实是非唯作等起。”这种说法不能采纳,因为第一巴拉基格的非唯作等起性,在巴利圣典和义注里都没有说过。经中确实说过:“意门没有罪。”怎么可能呢?当别人主动上前而行淫、自己随顺接受时,怎么会不随顺自己身体(根等部位)的动摇呢?应当知道,与随顺心相应,心生色在全身生起时,表业也微细地生起了。所以论中说“唯从身门等起,因此是身业”等等。不过在这里,心只是支分而已,身表才是构成身业的真正原因,不是心。在这里,心只是名为“身”的表业的支分,并不是身业性的支分;否则,淫行就该说成是“意业”了。因此论中说“不能依它而获得业性”。所谓“业性”,就是身业性。“这一切”,指等起等这些内容。“以学处为首”,是为了通过学处的名义,来涵盖各个学处所限定的罪。巴利
Yaṃ pana sāratthadīpaniyaṃ (sārattha. ṭī. pārājikakaṇḍa 2.66 pakiṇṇakakathāvaṇṇanā) vuttaṃ ‘‘kiriyasamuṭṭhānanti idaṃ yebhuyyavasena vuttaṃ parūpakkame sati sādiyantassa akiriyasamuṭṭhānabhāvato’’tiādi, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ paṭhamapārājikassa akiriyasamuṭṭhānatāya pāḷiaṭṭhakathāsu avuttattā. ‘‘Manodvāre āpatti nāma natthī’’ti (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanā; pārā. aṭṭha. 2.583-4) hi vuttaṃ. Kathañhi nāma parūpakkamena methunaṃ sādiyanto attano aṅgajātādikāyacalanaṃ na sādiyeyya, sādiyanacittānuguṇameva pana sakalasarīre cittajarūpasamuppattiyā viññattipi sukhumā samuppannā eva hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ, tenāha kāyadvāreneva samuṭṭhānato kāyakammantiādi. Cittaṃ panettha aṅgamattaṃ hotīti kāyaviññatti eva kāyakammabhāve kāraṇaṃ, na cittaṃ. Taṃ panettha kāyasaṅkhātāya viññattiyāyeva aṅgamattaṃ, na kāyakammabhāvassa, itarathā methunassa ‘‘manokamma’’nti vattabbato, tenāha ‘‘na tassa vasena kammabhāvo labbhatī’’ti. Kammabhāvoti kāyakammabhāvo. Sabbañcetanti etaṃ samuṭṭhānādikaṃ. Sikkhāpadasīsenāti taṃtaṃsikkhāpadaniyataāpattiyā eva gahaṇatthaṃ sikkhāpadamukhena.
调伏事例的注释巴利
Vinītavatthuvaṇṇanā
“这是什么?”是想要解说的人提出的问题。“这些……”等则是回答。“已判事例”是指世尊以“比丘,你已犯……”等语(《巴拉基格》67)所裁定的那些事例。把一个个事例摘取出来,作为提要的偈颂,就叫作摄颂,也叫结集偈、标举偈。至于“事偈”,就是“那时,有一位比丘……”等已判事例的巴利经文本身,因为它把各个已判事例结集起来,所以称为“事偈”,并不是按韵律格律的特征来命名的。或者也可以这样理解:摄颂所依的事例,就叫作事偈。“在此”,是指在已判事例中。“第二等”,是指第二巴拉基格等。“画师等工匠看了之后学习绘画等技艺的那种隐蔽形像”,就是图像的意思。巴利
Idaṃkinti kathetukāmatāpucchā. Imātiādi vissajjanaṃ. Vinītāni āpattiṃ tvaṃ bhikkhu āpannotiādinā (pārā. 67) bhagavatā vinicchinitāni vatthūni vinītavatthūni. Taṃ taṃ vatthuṃ uddharitvā dānato dassanato uddānabhūtā gāthā uddānagāthā, saṅgahagāthā, uddesagāthāti vuttaṃ hoti. Vatthu gāthāti tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhūtiādikā vinītavatthupāḷiyeva tesaṃ tesaṃ vinītavatthūnaṃ ganthanato ‘‘vatthugāthā’’ti vuttā , na chandovicitilakkhaṇena. Uddānagāthānaṃ vatthu vatthugāthāti evaṃ vā ettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Etthāti vinītavatthūsu. Dutiyādīnanti dutiyapārājikādīnaṃ. Yaṃ passitvā cittakārādayo sippikā cittakammādīni sikkhanti, taṃ paṭicchannakarūpaṃ, paṭimārūpanti attho.
67 “前二则”,就是母猴和瓦吉之子这两个事例。这两个事例也因为世尊已经调伏过,所以又被收进“已调伏事例”当中。其中“他心生追悔”等话,虽然他们最初并没有生起追悔,但这是针对后来被比丘们和世尊呵责、说过之后才生起追悔的情况而说的。“向世尊禀报此事”等话,是说比丘们和阿难长老先向世尊禀报,世尊又说明他们犯的是巴拉基格之后,他们害怕了,自己也前去,把心中的追悔后来禀报出来。世尊问“你确实是这样吗”等话时,他们回答“确实,世尊”,也是以承认的方式禀报。世尊又以“你已犯戒”等话,判定他们犯巴拉基格。但在随制说里,并没有把这一切都说出来,只说了与随制相应的一小部分;这里也是为了表明这些事例已被世尊调伏,才这样说的,应当这样理解。有些人没有注意到这个意思,就说“这些是另外的事例”。“茅草”,就是茅草的茎。“毛发”,就是人的头发。巴利
67.Purimāni dveti makkaṭīvajjiputtakavatthūni dve. Tānipi bhagavatā vinītabhāvena puna vinītavatthūsu pakkhittāni. Tattha tassa kukkuccaṃ ahosītiādi pana kiñcāpi tesaṃ paṭhamaṃ kukkuccaṃ na uppannaṃ, bhikkhūhi pana bhagavatā ca garahitvā vuttavacanaṃ sandhāya pacchā uppannattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Bhagavato etamatthaṃ ārocesuntiādi ca bhikkhūhi ānandattherena ca paṭhamaṃ bhagavato ārocite, bhagavatā ca tesaṃ pārājikatte pakāsite bhītā te sayampi gantvā attano kukkuccaṃ pacchā ārocenti eva. ‘‘Saccaṃ kira tva’’ntiādinā bhagavatā puṭṭhā pana ‘‘saccaṃ bhagavā’’ti paṭijānanavasenāpi ārocenti. Bhagavāpi āpattiṃ tvantiādinā tesaṃ pārājikattaṃ vinicchinoti eva. Anupaññattikathāyaṃ pana taṃ sabbaṃ avatvā anupaññattiyā anuguṇameva kiñcimattaṃ vuttaṃ, idhāpi tesaṃ vatthūnaṃ bhagavatā vinītabhāvadassanatthaṃ evaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Keci imaṃ adhippāyaṃ amanasikatvā ‘‘aññānevetāni vatthūnī’’ti vadanti. Kuseti kusatiṇāni. Kesehīti manussakesehi.
68 色泽如莲在这里是说:pokkhala 的意思是丰富和美好,它的状态说成 pokkharatā,是把 ra 加进去后形成的说法,意思就是丰富性、美好性。破坏就是征服。不染着就是不粘着。巴利
68.Vaṇṇapokkharatāyāti ettha pokkhalaṃ nāma samiddhaṃ sundarañca, tassa bhāvo ‘‘pokkharatā’’ti ra-kāraṃ katvā vutto, samiddhatā sundaratāti attho. Padhaṃsesīti abhibhavi. Na limpatīti na allīyati.
69 像这样转变了性相的比丘尼,从义理上说,即使只在一部僧众中受了达上,也仍然被归入在二部僧众中受达上的那一类里,因为比丘的达上比丘尼的达上更为殊胜。律典中“对彼诸罪,无犯”这句话,是用受格(宾格)与“我允许”这个词连接起来的。“女相”是指乳房等女性形相已经出现,所以说“男根……(中略)……女相已出现”。不过这并不是直接接着说的,而是已经说了“男根消失,女根出现”,同样地,后面也应当通过把握性相来了知对女根等的把握。“他们”指的是诸罪,“为从彼罪出”与这个相连,意思是“为了从那些罪中出罪”。怎么做呢?就是说:那一切只应由比丘尼们来做。由此,针对覆藏或不覆藏的重罪,就显示了半月敬悦行等规定。巴利
69. Evarūpā parivattaliṅgā bhikkhuniyo atthato ekato upasampannāpi ubhatosaṅghe upasampannāsuyeva saṅgayhanti bhikkhūpasampadāya bhikkhunīupasampadatopi ukkaṭṭhattā. Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘tāhi āpattīhi anāpatti’’nti upayogavacanaṃ katvā anujānāmīti padena sambandhitabbaṃ. Itthiliṅganti thanādikaṃ itthisaṇṭhānaṃ vuttanti āha – ‘‘purisa…pe… itthisaṇṭhānaṃ uppanna’’nti. Taṃ nānantarikato pana ‘‘purisindriyampi antarahitaṃ, itthindriyañca uppanna’’nti vuttameva hoti, evaṃ uparipi liṅgaggahaṇeneva itthindriyādiggahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tāti āpattiyo, tassa vuṭṭhātunti iminā sambandho, tāhi āpattīhi vuṭṭhāpetunti attho. Kathanti āha tā sabbāpi bhikkhunīhi kātabbantiādi. Tena paṭicchannāyapi appaṭicchannāyapi garukāpattiyā pakkhamānattacaraṇādikaṃ vidhiṃ dasseti.
入胎判定说的是:顺着相关情形而作的入胎判定。以强不善业来说,就是通奸等行为。以弱善来说,就是力量被前面说的强不善业所破坏、由此而变成微弱的善。以弱不善来说,就是力量被能生起男性身份的梵行等强善业所破坏、由此而变成微弱的通奸等不善。在善趣中,因为两种身份都是善业所生,所以只有依不善而灭没,只有依善而生起,因此说“两者都”等。但在恶趣中,两者的生起和灭没都只依不善,那里只有强弱之别而已。巴利
Okkantikavinicchayoti pasaṅgānuguṇaṃ otaraṇakavinicchayo. Balavaakusalenāti paradārikakammādinā. Dubbalakusalenāti yathāvuttabalavākusalopahatasattinā tato eva dubbalabhūtena kusalena. Dubbalaakusalenāti purisabhāvuppādakabrahmacariyādibalavakusalopahatasattinā tato eva dubbalabhūtena paradārikādiakusalena. Sugatiyaṃ bhāvadvayassa kusalakammajattā akusaleneva vināso kusaleneva uppattīti āha ubhayampītiādi. Duggatiyaṃ pana akusaleneva ubhinnampi uppatti ca vināso ca, tattha dubbalabalavabhāvova viseso.
“来,我们走吧”——为了避开与比丘尼约好同路而行所犯的巴吉帝亚罪,所以说了“解除约定”这句话。由此说明:即使是在同一个村子的范围内,从村外约好一起走到村内的住家,也一样是犯戒的。接着说明解除约定的方法,所以说了“我们”等话。“村外”,就是指村与村之间。依照“伴行的比丘尼已经离开……”等(巴吉帝亚693)所说的无犯标准,所以说“村与村之间……中略……无犯”。“舍弃”,就是放弃。“有惭者……中略……可以得到”——即使是摄受那些被性别转变之苦所逼迫的人,如果不加摄受,她们也可能退堕回低劣的状态,所以依照“在危难中”而说为无犯。应当带着这样的伴行者一起走。“无惭者……中略……可以得到”——因为与无惭者共住于同一界内、同一甘马等,有产生犯戒的可能,所以她们会偏向不善的一方,由此也应当知道“与无惭者共同受用是不合适的”。如果说是合适的,那么在这种情况下,有惭者因为属于应当摄受的一类,如果没有伴行者而在村间等处行走,也同样会犯戒。“亲戚不成……中略……合适”——说这话的人以此在注疏中指出了未来才出现的情形。在那种情形下,除了可信赖的亲戚比丘尼之外,对于一个于比丘尼身份中不喜乐、本性有慢的人来说,因为有危难处所的可能,所以这种说法虽然未被一概否定,但对其他人确实是不合适的,应当这样理解。在比丘身份时也是如此。以那为依靠,就是以那为依止师。应当受取戒师,就是为了受达上而应当受取戒师。巴利
‘‘Ehi mayaṃ gamissāmā’’ti bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ saṃvidhāya ekaddhānagamane pācittiyāpattiparihāratthaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘saṃvidahanaṃ parimocetvā’’ti. Tena ekagāmakkhettepi bahigāmato antaragharaṃ saṃvidhāya gamanampi āpattikaramevāti dasseti. Parimocanavidhiṃ dassento āha mayantiādi. Bahigāmeti gāmantare. Dutiyikā bhikkhunī pakkantā vā hotītiādinā (pāci. 693) vuttaanāpattilakkhaṇaṃ anulometīti vuttaṃ ‘‘gāmantara…pe… anāpattī’’ti. Kopetvāti pariccajitvā. Lajjiniyo…pe… labbhatīti liṅgaparivattanadukkhapīḷitassa saṅgahepi asati hīnāyāvattanampi bhaveyyāti ‘‘āpadāsū’’ti vuttaanāpattianulomena vuttaṃ. Tāya dutiyikaṃ gahetvāva gantabbaṃ. Alajjiniyo…pe… labbhatīti alajjinīhi saddhiṃ ekakammādisaṃvāse āpattisambhavato tā asantapakkhaṃ bhajantīti vuttaṃ, imināpetaṃ veditabbaṃ ‘‘alajjinīhi saddhiṃ paribhogo na vaṭṭatī’’ti. Yadi hi vaṭṭeyya, tatopi dutiyikaṃ vinā gāmantaragamanādīsu āpatti eva siyā saṅgāhikattā tāsaṃ saṅgāhikalajjinigaṇato viya. Ñātikā na honti…pe… vaṭṭatīti vadantīti iminā aṭṭhakathāsu anāgatabhāvaṃ dīpeti. Tatthāpi vissāsikañātikabhikkhuniyo vinā bhikkhunibhāve aramantassa mānapakatikassa āpadāṭṭhānasambhavena taṃ vacanaṃ appaṭikkhittampi tadaññesaṃ na vaṭṭatiyevāti gahetabbaṃ. Bhikkhubhāvepīti bhikkhukālepi . Taṃ nissāyāti taṃ nissayācariyaṃ katvā. Upajjhā gahetabbāti upasampadāgahaṇatthaṃ upajjhā gahetabbā.
律甘马这句话,是针对分配(物品)而说的。应当再做,就是应当再次分配。再次接受后,在七天之内可以使用。这是依据“诸比丘,我允许比丘尼的储存物由比丘、比丘的储存物由比丘尼让人接受后再受用”(《小品》421)这段教导,为了说明再次接受后受用是允许的。在第七天,这也是为了说明:不犯尼萨耆亚罪,还可以再受用七天。本性,指性相没有转变。守护,是指保护其免于舍弃接受;意思是,因为没有作分配,所以不舍弃接受。巴利
Vinayakammanti vikappanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Puna kātabbanti puna vikappetabbaṃ. Puna paṭiggahetvā sattāhaṃ vaṭṭatīti ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, bhikkhunīnaṃ sannidhiṃ bhikkhūhi, bhikkhūnaṃ sannidhiṃ bhikkhunīhi ca paṭiggāhāpetvā paribhuñjitu’’nti (cūḷava. 421) vacanato puna paṭiggahetvā paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭatīti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Sattame divaseti idañca nissaggiyaṃ anāpajjitvāva punapi sattāhaṃ paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭatīti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Pakatattoti aparivattaliṅgo. Rakkhatīti taṃ paṭiggahaṇavijahanato rakkhati, avibhattatāya paṭiggahaṇaṃ na vijahatīti adhippāyo.
自己拿取之后再放置,意思是亲手接取之后再放置。正在受用的人犯戒,是指当性相转变发生之后,再次没有接取就受用的人所犯的戒。巴利
Sāmaṃ gahetvāna nikkhipeyyāti sahatthena paṭiggahetvāna nikkhipeyya. Paribhuñjantassa āpattīti liṅgaparivatte jāte puna appaṭiggahetvā paribhuñjantassa āpatti.
关于“退转于下”这一说法,这里有些人讲:“原本清净的比丘没有舍弃学处,却说‘我要成为在家人’,于是取在家人的形相,这就是退转于下。”这种说法不合理,因为仅仅这样做并没有舍弃比丘的身份。另一些人则说:“犯了巴拉基格的比丘舍弃比丘的身份认定,转入在家人的状态,这也是退转于下。”这种说法才是合理的。因为犯了巴拉基格的人,只要覆藏那件事,直到他还保持着比丘的身份认定期间,他就仍然是比丘,因为巴拉基格正是针对比丘们制定的。经中确实说过“若有比丘……”。也正因如此,他即使参与共住,也不算是盗共住者,不会产生同宿等罪过;但对贬低毁谤他的人则会产生巴吉帝亚。经中确实这样说过——巴利
Hīnāyāvattanenāti ettha keci ‘‘pakatattassa bhikkhuno sikkhaṃ appaccakkhāya ‘gihī bhavissāmī’ti gihiliṅgaggahaṇaṃ hīnāyāvattana’’nti vadanti, taṃ na yuttaṃ tattakena bhikkhubhāvassa avijahanato. Aññe pana ‘‘pārājikaṃ āpannassa bhikkhupaṭiññaṃ pahāya gihiliṅgabhāvūpagamanampi hīnāyāvattana’’nti vadanti, taṃ yuttameva. Pārājikaṃ āpanno hi taṃ paṭicchādetvā yāva bhikkhupaṭiñño hoti, tāva bhikkhu eva hoti bhikkhūnameva pārājikassa paññattattā. ‘‘Yo pana bhikkhū’’ti hi vuttaṃ. Tathā hi so saṃvāsaṃ sādiyantopi theyyasaṃvāsako na hoti, sahaseyyādiāpattiñca na janeti, attānaṃ omasantassa pācittiyañca janeti. Vuttañhi –
一个人不清净,犯了某一条巴拉基格法,如果一位持有清净见的人找机会以辱骂的意图对他说,就犯贬损语罪。巴利
‘‘Asuddho hoti puggalo aññataraṃ pārājikaṃ dhammaṃ ajjhāpanno, tañce suddhadiṭṭhi samāno okāsaṃ kārāpetvā akkosādhippāyo vadeti, āpatti omasavādassā’’ti (pārā. 389).
有些人则说:犯了巴拉基格罪的人承认了自己的过失之后,穿上在家人的衣相,这就归入舍学之中,因为通过这种承认,他已经舍弃了比丘的身份。正因如此,在《律决择》等著作里,把退转于下归并到舍学中来说,而没有单独另说。所以,比丘尼因为想还俗而穿上在家人的衣相,在这里就是退转于下,因为她们没有舍学这回事。她们舍弃受持的情况也应该完全说明。他们这样说,这种说法也是无法反驳的。因此,犯了巴拉基格罪的比丘和比丘尼说“我要还俗”而穿上在家人的衣相,应当理解为退转于下。还俗也是这同一个意思的别名,因此在《小小学处》中,以“断绝、舍弃、取、还俗”里的“还俗”一名,来说明舍弃决意。巴利
Eke pana ‘‘pārājikaṃ āpannānaṃ dosaṃ paṭijānitvā gihiliṅgaggahaṇaṃ nāma sikkhāpaccakkhāne samodhānaṃ gacchati tenāpi paṭiññāya bhikkhubhāvassa vijahanato. Teneva vinayavinicchayādīsu hīnāyāvattanaṃ sikkhāpaccakkhāne samodhānetvā visuṃ taṃ na vuttaṃ. Tasmā bhikkhunīnaṃ vibbhamitukāmatāya gihiliṅgaggahaṇaṃ idha hīnāyāvattanaṃ tāsaṃ sikkhāpaccakkhānassa abhāvato. Tāsaṃ paṭiggahaṇavijahanassāpi sabbaso vattabbattā’’ti vadanti, tampi appaṭibāhiyameva. Tasmā pārājikānaṃ bhikkhunīnañca ‘‘uppabbajissāmī’’ti gihiliṅgaggahaṇaṃ hīnāyāvattananti gahetabbaṃ. Vibbhamotipi etasseva nāmaṃ, teneva taṃ khuddasikkhāyaṃ ‘‘acchedavissajjanagāhavibbhamā’’ti adhiṭṭhānavijahane vibbhamanāmena vuttaṃ.
所谓“无期待舍弃”,是指不送给别人,对自己不需要的,把已受持的物品丢弃到外面。有些人说:“对于已受持的物品,有期待的人因为先前已受持,为了摆脱这种状态,仅仅舍弃受持也算无期待舍弃,就像对衣等物的决意舍除一样。”这种说法不对,因为没有这样的言教。比如对衣等物,说了以无期待舍弃来放下决意之后,又另外说了舍除;这里也应当同样说明。又比如衣等物即使系在身上,一旦舍除,决意就消失;但这里不是这样。因为对于已受持的物品,即使没有期待的人,只要身体离开那件物品,就已经舍弃了受持。所以这样说:“哪怕舍弃一百次,只要到了自己手里,就仍然是已受持。”关于“无期待舍弃”,这里只应说到“无期待”为止,因为除了无期待之外,这里并没有别的舍弃;这里并没有像舍除那样的舍弃规定。再说,如果只要舍弃受持就算数,那么对于先前已受持的食物,当生起想吃的欲望时,只要舍弃受持再重新受持,就可以随意吃;这样一来,贮藏学处中所说的一切抉择差别就全都毫无意义了。正如那里所说:巴利
Anapekkhavissajjanenāti aññassa adatvāva anatthikasseva paṭiggahitavatthūnaṃ bahi chaḍḍanena. Keci ‘‘paṭiggahitavatthūsu sāpekkhassa pure paṭiggahitabhāvato parimocanatthaṃ tattha paṭiggahamattassa vissajjanampi anapekkhavissajjanameva cīvarādiadhiṭṭhānapaccuddhāro viyā’’ti vadanti, taṃ na sundaraṃ tathāvacanābhāvā. Yatheva hi cīvarādīsu anapekkhavissajjanena adhiṭṭhānavijahanaṃ vatvāpi visuṃ paccuddhāro ca vutto, evamidhāpi vattabbaṃ, yathā ca cīvarādīsu kāyapaṭibaddhesupi paccuddhārena adhiṭṭhānaṃ vigacchati, na evamidha. Idha pana paṭiggahitavatthusmiṃ anapekkhassāpi kāyato mutteyeva tasmiṃ paṭiggahaṇaṃ vijahati. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘satakkhattumpi pariccajatu, yāva attano hatthagataṃ paṭiggahitamevā’’ti. Anapekkhavissajjanenāti ettha ca ‘‘anapekkhāyā’’ti ettakameva vattabbaṃ anapekkhataṃ muñcitvā idha visuṃ vissajjanassa abhāvā. Na hettha paccuddhāre viya vissajjanavidhānamatthi. Apica paṭiggahaṇamattavissajjane sati pure paṭiggahitopi āhāro bhuñjitukamyatāya uppannāya paṭiggahaṇamattaṃ vissajjetvā puna paṭiggahetvā yathāsukhaṃ bhuñjitabbo siyāti, tathā ca sannidhikārakasikkhāpade vuttā sabbāpi vinicchayabhedā niratthakā eva siyuṃ. Vuttañhi tattha –
如果钵有结节,或者油脂渗进了结节缝里……中间省略……在那种钵里,第二天再吃的人,犯巴吉帝亚。等等。巴利
‘‘Gaṇṭhikapattassa vā gaṇṭhikantare sneho paviṭṭho hoti…pe… tādise pattepi punadivase bhuñjantassa pācittiya’’ntiādi (pāci. aṭṭha. 253).
在这里,本来只应该说“以无所期待的心舍弃受持之后再吃”,但经文并没有这样只说这一点。在某些情况下,比如有结节的钵等,对受持本来就没有任何人的期待,也没有为了断除这种期待而努力;即便如此,对于放到那里的食物,受持仍然不会消失。为什么?因为比丘的钵里存在着想再吃一次的期待,而这种期待也存在于钵中的食物上。不舍弃钵,就不可能舍弃钵中的食物;不舍弃食物,也不可能舍弃食物上的受持。因此应当得出结论:只有舍弃物品本身,才是“无所期待地舍弃”,而不是舍弃受持。正因为如此,在贮藏学处的无犯部分中——巴利
Tattha pana ‘‘paṭiggahaṇaṃ anapekkhacittena vissajjetvā bhuñjitabba’’nti ettakameva vattabbaṃ, na ca vuttaṃ. Katthaci īdisesu ca gaṇṭhikapattādīsu paṭiggahaṇe apekkhā kassacipi nattheva tappahānāya vāyāmato, tathāpi tatthagataāmise paṭiggahaṇaṃ na vigacchati. Kasmā? Bhikkhussa patte puna bhuñjitukāmatāpekkhāya vijjamānattā pattagatike āhārepi tassā vattanato. Na hi pattaṃ avissajjetvā taggatikaṃ āhāraṃ vissajjetuṃ sakkā, nāpi āhāraṃ avissajjetvā taggatikaṃ paṭiggahaṇaṃ vissajjetuṃ. Tasmā vatthuno vissajjanameva anapekkhavissajjanaṃ, na paṭiggahaṇassāti niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ. Teneva sannidhisikkhāpadassa anāpattivāre –
在七天内决意、舍弃、失坏、毁坏、烧毁,或被截取后拿走,或以信任而拿取;对未受具足戒者,把所弃、所吐、所舍之物,无所顾念地布施之后又再取回而受用——巴利
‘‘Antosattāhaṃ adhiṭṭheti, vissajjeti, nassati, vinassati, ḍayhati, acchinditvā gaṇhanti, vissāsaṃ gaṇhanti, anupasampannassa cattena vantena muttena anapekkho datvā paṭilabhitvā paribhuñjatī’’ti –
像这样,在一切处所说的都只是对物品的舍弃而已。而在这里,由于“在七天内决意”这句话是为外用而决意的说法,所以即使没有舍弃物品,仅仅以不想占为己有的清净心,为了外用的目的而加以限定,也单独成为一种舍弃受取的理由。针对这一点,说成仅仅是舍弃受取,或许也可以说是说得好的;但那样一来,“再次受取之后将受用”就不应说成是受取的舍弃了,因为这里所指的正是外用的决意。巴利
Evaṃ sabbattha vatthuvissajjanameva vuttaṃ. Ettha ca ‘‘antosattāhaṃ adhiṭṭhetī’’ti bāhiraparibhogāya adhiṭṭhānavacanato vatthuṃ avissajjetvāpi kevalaṃ anajjhoharitukāmatāya suddhacittena bāhiraparibhogatthāya niyamanampi visuṃ ekaṃ paṭiggahaṇavijahanakāraṇameva, idañca sandhāya paṭiggahaṇamattavissajjanaṃ vuttaṃ siyā, suvuttameva siyā, tathā ca ‘‘puna paṭiggahetvā paribhuñjissāmī’’ti paṭiggahaṇavissajjanaṃ na vattabbaṃ siyā bāhiraparibhogādhiṭṭhānassa idhādhippetattā.
《义明灯》(《义明灯·巴拉基格篇》2.69)中说:“‘以无所顾念的舍弃’在这里是指:还没有把东西给别人,只是因为不需要,就对物品想‘这东西没用了,我现在不再用它了’,或者在接受时想‘以后再接受来用’,以这样的无所顾念而舍弃。”这是说,对于想受用的人来说,仅仅舍弃接受也成了舍弃接受的原因,这种说法不能采纳。应该采纳前面那种,也就是为了外用而决意。不过,这一点在诸注疏里并没有单独说明,而是收在解释圣典句子“以称为无所顾念的舍弃而舍弃”的释义里。“失坏、毁灭、烧毁、信任而取”这些词,应当知道都归在“截断而取”这一句里。巴利
Sāratthadīpaniyañhi (sārattha. dī. pārājikakaṇḍa 2.69) ‘‘anapekkhavissajjanenāti ettha aññassa adatvāva anatthikatāya ‘natthi iminā kammaṃ na dāni naṃ paribhuñjissāmī’ti vatthūsu vā, ‘puna paṭiggahetvā paṭibhuñjissāmī’ti paṭiggahaṇe vā anapekkhavissajjanenā’’ti evaṃ paribhuñjitukāmasseva paṭiggahaṇamattavissajjanampi paṭiggahaṇavijahanakāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Purimameva pana bāhiraparibhogādhiṭṭhānaṃ gahetabbaṃ. Idaṃ pana aṭṭhakathāsu ‘‘anapekkhavissajjanasaṅkhāte vissajjetī’’ti vuttapāḷipadatthe saṅgahetvā visuṃ na vuttaṃ. Nassati, vinassati, ḍayhati, vissāsaṃ vā gaṇhantīti imāni pana padāni acchinditvā gaṇhantīti imasmiṃ pade saṅgahitānīti veditabbaṃ.
“以截断而取”是指用强力等方式,从未受具足戒者那里截断而取。对于已受具足戒者,在截取和信任取等情况下,受取并没有舍弃。“于此”是指比丘的住处。“所种植的”是指他所种下的树木和灌木。“在十三种认可中”是指在被称为认可的十三种认可中:分食者、分房舍者、管理库藏者、受取衣者、分配衣者、分配粥者、分配果者、分配副食者、舍弃小事者、取得雨浴衣者、取得钵者、园林使者和沙弥使者。巴利
Acchinditvā gahaṇenāti anupasampannānaṃ balakkārādinā acchinditvā gahaṇena. Upasampannānañhi acchindanavissāsaggāhesu paṭiggahaṇaṃ na vijahati. Etthāti bhikkhuvihāre. Uparopakāti tena ropitā rukkhagacchā. Terasasusammutīsūti bhattuddesakasenāsanapaññāpakabhaṇḍāgārikacīvarapaṭiggāhakacīvarabhājakayāgubhājakaphalabhājakakhajjabhājakaappamattakavissajjakasādiyagāhāpakapattagāhāpakaārāmikapesakasāmaṇerapesakasammutisaṅkhātāsu terasasu sammutīsu.
关于后来分配住所这件事:不论住所分配已经停止,还是尚未停止,由于咖提那衣的敷展以及以它为根本的五种利益都不存在,这两种情况性质相同。所以,经文不显示那里有“住所分配已停止”这一情况,而只是为了指出比丘们在那里应当做的摄受,才说了“若于后来……”等话。“若于不善果报……乃至……应只给予六夜敬悦”,这句话是针对两种人说的:一是因覆藏的共通罪而别住、却未受别住的人;二是到了性别转变时正行半月敬悦的人。如果在他还未受半月敬悦时,性别又再转变,那就应当先给予别住;只有对已行完别住的人,才应给予六夜敬悦。这里不存在给予别住的事,因为在他还是比丘的时候,罪并没有覆藏的性质。但如果他在还是比丘时也故意不告白,罪就成了覆藏,由于罪有覆藏的性质,所以也应给予别住——诸师是这样说的。应当知道:无论男女,若犯了巴拉基格,即使性别转变,因为巴拉基格的性质在同一生命体中不会舍离,所以不应再给予达上。正因为这样,才用断头之人等比喻来说明他们。巴利
Pacchimikāya senāsanaggāhe paṭippassaddhepi appaṭippassaddhepi kathinatthārassa, tammūlakānaṃ pañcānisaṃsānañca abhāvassa samānattā tattha vijjamānampi senāsanaggāhapaṭippassaddhiṃ adassetvā tattha bhikkhūhi kattabbaṃ saṅgahameva dassetuṃ sace pacchimikāyātiādi vuttaṃ. Sace akusalavipāke …pe… chārattaṃ mānattameva dātabbanti idaṃ paṭicchannāya sādhāraṇāpattiyā parivasantassa asamādinnaparivāsassa vā liṅge parivatte pakkhamānattaṃ carantassa vasena vuttaṃ. Sace panassa pakkhamānatte asamādinne eva puna liṅgaṃ parivattati, parivāsaṃ datvā parivutthaparivāsasseva chārattaṃ mānattaṃ dātabbaṃ. Parivāsadānaṃ natthi bhikkhukāle appaṭicchannabhāvato. Sace pana bhikkhukālepi sañcicca nāroceti, āpatti paṭicchannāva hoti, āpattipaṭicchannabhāvato parivāso ca dātabboti vadanti. Pārājikaṃ āpannānaṃ itthipurisānaṃ liṅge parivattepi pārājikattassa ekasmiṃ attabhāve avijahanato puna upasampadā na dātabbāti gahetabbaṃ. Teneva tesaṃ sīsacchinnapurisādayo nidassitā.
71 “同样如此”这句话,是在进一步说明“不管有没有释放”这个意思。“其他人”是针对凡夫说的。因为对凡夫来说,在这种情形下不产生贪著是很难的;而对入流等圣者来说,在这件事上并不存在困难。圣者确实不会犯巴拉基格这类被世间所呵责的罪。巴利
71.Tathevāti muccatu vā mā vāti imamatthaṃ atidisati. Aññesanti puthujjane sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tesañhi īdise ṭhāne asādiyanaṃ dukkaraṃ sotāpannādiariyānaṃ tattha dukkarattābhāvā. Na hi ariyā pārājikādilokavajjāpattiṃ āpajjanti.
73 牙齿上下咬合紧密,上排牙齿压住下排牙齿而停住,中间没有缝隙,就是这个意思。所以说“口腔里面没有空隙”。但如果把嘴唇的肉扒开,对牙齿本身起动作意,因为是以外相触碰外相,所以判为土喇咤亚。牙齿和舌头伸到口外的情况,也是同样的判法。所谓“焦渴饿鬼”,是指身体被从毛孔中生起的火焰烧灼,因而极度干渴恐惧的样子。“等”字还包括了饥渴饿鬼、只剩皮骨附着的饿鬼、身形可怖的饿鬼。“使其失去知觉”是指让他对自己所受的任何侵犯都毫无知觉,以这种方式来做。这也表明:如果他没失去知觉而加以领受,那就是巴拉基格。“身净根受损”是指由于风、胆等病患,使得身识无法生起,身净根因此受到损害,但并不是身净根完全毁坏。“钵碰到头顶”,是在行道而施设行道的时候发生的。因为不想进入的意乐,而以外相触碰外相,所以判为土喇咤亚;如果是想亲近的人,在这里也只是恶作,所以说“也只是恶作”。巴利
73.Suphusitāti uparimāya dantapantiyā heṭṭhimā dantapanti āhacca ṭhitā, avivaṭāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘antomukhe okāso natthī’’ti. Uppāṭite pana oṭṭhamaṃse dante suyeva upakkamantassa thullaccayanti nimittena bahinimitte chupanattā vuttaṃ. Bahinikkhantadantajivhāsupi eseva nayo. Nijjhāmataṇhikā nāma lomakūpehi samuṭṭhitaaggijālāhi daḍḍhasarīratāya ativiya tasitarūpā. Ādi-saddena khuppipāsāsurā aṭṭhicammāvasiṭṭhā bhayānakasarīrā petiyo saṅgahitā. Visaññaṃ katvāti yathā so katampi upakkamaṃ na jānāti, evaṃ katvā. Tena ca visaññī ahutvā sādiyantassa pārājikamevāti dasseti. Upahatakāyappasādoti vātapittādidosehi kāyaviññāṇānuppādakabhāvena dūsitakāyappasādo, na pana vinaṭṭhakāyappasādo. Sīse patteti maggena maggappaṭipādane jāte. Appavesetukāmatāya eva nimittena nimittachupane thullaccayaṃ vuttaṃ, sevetukāmassa pana tatthāpi dukkaṭamevāti āha ‘‘dukkhaṭameva sāmanta’’nti.
74 用“生”这个词——也就是茉莉花的另一种叫法——来指称它所依附的花丛,所以说“茉莉花丛”。由此也说明:以茉莉花为标志的树林,就叫“茉莉花林”,这是一个不省略语素的复合词。“一味”是指不与心路心混杂。巴利
74. Jāti-saddena sumanapupphapariyāyena tannissayo gumbo adhippetoti āha ‘‘jātipupphagumbāna’’nti. Tena ca jātiyā upalakkhitaṃ vanaṃ jātiyāvananti aluttasamāsoti dasseti. Ekarasanti vīthicittehi asammissaṃ.
77 女人造了违犯之事,这事已经发生,就叫“事已发生”。所谓“木刺门、荆棘门”,就是木刺门和荆棘门,也可以这样读。其中,在两边埋下木柱,从中间凿穿,穿进两三根木刺做成的,就叫木刺门。出入的时候把它取下来,用带刺的树枝丛盖住堵上,这样的门就叫荆棘门。为了遮挡村门,用木板或带刺的树枝等做成的门扇,因为没有门槛和门闩,一个人没法关上或打开,就在下面装一个轮子,转动它就能轻松关门,针对这个情况,就说“装有转轮的门”。轮子本身因为要拉动,具有关闭和打开的作用,所以叫转轮;装上它的门扇也叫转轮,装上转轮的门就是装有转轮的门。至于大门,会装上两三个转轮,所以说“在门板上”等等。“在小格窗上”,是指在竹篾和带刺树枝等做成的遮挡物上。“可旋转的转轮小格窗门”,是指装有转轮机关、可以旋转的转轮大门。“系绑”,就是缚上,或者用绳子捆起来。“只有一扇布幔门”,这里因为同类,也把草席幔门包括在内。接着“比丘们……坐着”,这是为了显示比丘们在场。即使是躺着,也可以作意;但如果躺下后睡着了,就不能作意,因为那时已处在没有知觉的状态。就像私下静坐一样,关门这件事,是为了阻止女人进来而允许的,所以说“比丘尼”等等。“架上梯子”,这是针对下层有门闩的情况说的。四面围起来的墙壁只有一处相连,所以说“一间墙壁”。“后面那些人的负担”,是针对巴利文里出现的内容说的。“无论被什么围住”,这里围栏的高度标准,和前面说过的够一人躺卧的标准一样。巴利
77.Uppanne vatthumhīti itthīhi kataajjhācāravatthusmiṃ. Rukkhasūcikaṇṭakadvāranti rukkhasūcidvāraṃ kaṇṭakadvāraṃ, evameva vā pāṭho. Tattha yaṃ ubhosu passesu rukkhathambhe nikhanitvā tattha majjhe vijjhitvā dve tisso rukkhasūciyo pavesetvā karonti, taṃ rukkhasūcidvāraṃ nāma. Pavesananikkhamanakāle pana apanetvā thakanakayoggena kaṇṭakasākhāpaṭalena yuttaṃ dvāraṃ kaṇṭakadvāraṃ nāma. Gāmadvārassa pidhānatthaṃ padarena kaṇṭakasākhādīhi vā katassa kavāṭassa udukkhalapāsarahitatāya ekena saṃvarituṃ vivarituñca asakkuṇeyyassa heṭṭhā ekaṃ cakkaṃ yojenti, yena parivattamānena taṃ kavāṭaṃ sukhathakanaṃ hoti, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘cakkalakayuttadvāra’’nti. Cakkameva hi lātabbaṭṭhena saṃvaraṇavivaraṇatthāya gahetabbaṭṭhena cakkalakaṃ, tena yuttampi kavāṭaṃ cakkalakaṃ nāma, tena yuttaṃ dvāraṃ cakkalakayuttadvāraṃ. Mahādvāresu pana dve tīṇipi cakkalakāni yojentīti āha phalakesūtiādi. Kiṭikāsūti veḷupesikāhi kaṇṭakasākhādīhi ca katathakanakesu. Saṃsaraṇakiṭikadvāranti cakkalakayantena saṃsaraṇakiṭikāyuttamahādvāraṃ. Gopphetvāti āvuṇitvā, rajjūhi ganthetvā vā. Ekaṃ dussasāṇidvāramevāti ettha kilañjasāṇidvārampi saṅgahaṃ gacchati taggatikattā. Atha bhikkhū…pe… nisinnā hontīti idaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ sannihitabhāvadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Nipannepi ābhogaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati, nipajjitvā niddāyante pana ābhogaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭati asantapakkhe ṭhitattā. Raho nisajjāya viya dvārasaṃvaraṇaṃ nāma mātugāmānaṃ pavesananivāraṇatthaṃ anuññātanti āha bhikkhuniṃ vātiādi. Nisseṇiṃ āropetvāti idaṃ heṭṭhimatalassa sadvārabandhatāya vuttaṃ. Catūsu disāsu parikkhittassa kuṭṭassa ekābaddhatāya ‘‘ekakuṭṭake’’ti vuttaṃ. Pacchimānaṃ bhāroti pāḷiyā āgacchante sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yena kenaci parikkhitteti ettha parikkhepassa ubbedhato pamāṇaṃ sahaseyyappahonake vuttasadisameva.
“大院落”指宽广的庭院,由此也显示出那里有许多人往来,所以说“大菩提树”等。
“日出时起身,无犯”,是因为夜晚属于无犯的范围,以清净心躺卧的缘故。
“醒来后再睡则犯”,是说日出后醒来,不论知不知道日出,没有起身而继续躺着,以躺卧的相续再次入睡。由于应当起身做的关门等事没有做,这个犯是由不作为而生;在无犯的范围内躺卧的行为,并不构成这个犯的支分。应当知道,这个犯:在这种情形下属于不作为;白天没有关门就躺下的那一刹那属于有作为;也是无心之犯。
即使在日出前醒来,直到日出时仍躺着的人,依照前面的方式同样犯戒。“我将在日出时起身”等等……“也仍然是犯”:这里,他什么时候犯戒呢?回答说:夜晚还不算犯,因为已经说过“白天犯,不是夜晚犯”。所说的“不敬的恶作不能免除”中的恶作,并不是指白天躺卧睡眠的恶作,而是指不敬的恶作。这样,应当知道,在日出时,他所犯的是由不作为所生的无心之犯。
如果这个人关好门,想着“我将在日出时起身”而躺下,而门在日出时被其他人打开,他仍然无犯,因为关门在夜间和白天的区分上并没有差别。应当这样把握:犯戒的时间差别只是针对犯戒本身而言,并不是针对防护而言,因为已经说过“没有关门而在夜晚躺卧”。白天关门后躺下的人,即使门被任何人打开,也无犯。他们也说,自己不起来,如果有原因而门被打开,也无犯。而且,没有按照既定的界限起身,所以只在日出时才起身。
“也仍然是犯”,这是就根本犯而说的。而不敬的犯,即使他在日出前起身,也仍然会有,因为已经说过“恶作不能免除”。“恶作不能免除”的意思是:即使他在日出前起身,脱离了根本犯,也仍然不能免除不敬的恶作。巴利
Mahāpariveṇanti mahantaṃ aṅgaṇaṃ, tena ca bahujanasañcāraṃ dasseti, tenāha mahābodhītiādi. Aruṇe uggate vuṭṭhahati, anāpatti anāpattikhettabhūtāya rattiyā suddhacittena nipannattā. Pabujjhitvā puna supati āpattīti aruṇe uggate pabujjhitvā aruṇuggamanaṃ ñatvā vā añatvā vā anuṭṭhahitvā sayitasantānena supati uṭṭhahitvā kattabbassa dvārasaṃvaraṇādino akatattā akiriyasamuṭṭhānā āpatti hoti anāpattikhette katanipajjanakiriyāya anaṅgattā. Ayañhi āpatti īdise ṭhāne akiriyā, divā asaṃvaritvā nipajjanakkhaṇe kiriyā ca acittakā cāti veditabbā. Purāruṇā pabujjhitvāpi yāva aruṇuggamanā sayantassāpi purimanayena āpattiyeva. Aruṇe uggate vuṭṭhahissāmīti…pe… āpattiyevāti ettha kadā tassa āpattīti? Vuccate – na tāva rattiyaṃ ‘‘divā āpajjati no ratti’’nti (pari. 323) vuttattā. ‘‘Anādariyadukkaṭā na muccatī’’ti vuttadukkaṭaṃ pana divāsayanadukkaṭameva na hoti anādariyadukkaṭattā. Evaṃ aruṇuggamane pana acittakaṃ akiriyasamuṭṭhānaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjatīti veditabbaṃ. So sace dvāraṃ saṃvaritvā ‘‘aruṇe uggate vuṭṭhahissāmī’’ti nipajjati, dvāre ca aññehi aruṇuggamanakāle vivaṭepi tassa anāpattiyeva dvārapidahanassa rattidivābhāgesu visesābhāvā. Āpattiāpajjanasseva kālaviseso icchitabbo, na tapparihārassāti gahetabbaṃ, ‘‘dvāraṃ asaṃvaritvā rattiṃ nipajjatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.77) hi vuttaṃ. Divā saṃvaritvā nipannassa kenaci vivaṭepi dvāre anāpattiyeva. Attanāpi anuṭṭhahitvāva sati paccaye vivaṭepi anāpattīti vadanti. Yathāparicchedameva ca na vuṭṭhātīti aruṇe uggateyeva uṭṭhāti. Āpattiyevāti mūlāpattiṃyeva sandhāya vuttaṃ, anādariyaāpatti pana purāruṇā uṭṭhitassāpi tassa hoteva ‘‘dukkaṭā na muccatī’’ti vuttattā, dukkaṭā na muccatīti ca purāruṇā uṭṭhahitvā mūlāpattiyā muttopi anādariyadukkaṭā na muccatīti adhippāyo.
“以睡眠的方式躺下”这句话,是依照惯用语来说的。不过,因为他的双脚还没有离开地面,所以这个人并不算真正“躺卧”,因此说无犯。“倚靠着睡”是指从腰部以上,直到背脊的任何一小部分都不接触地面,靠着柱子等物睡觉。而如果让腰部接触地面,那就叫做“躺卧”了。躺卧的特征是背脊伸展。在行大礼拜等动作中,因为背脊是横向伸展的,所以也属于躺卧,因此应当避免犯戒;这在“为了礼拜而俯伏在脚前”等说法中,因为已经就俯卧本身作了说明。他在倒下的那一刹那也无犯,因为那时还没有进入犯戒的范围;进入犯戒范围之后,他随即就起身了。但如果因为失去知觉,之后也没有进入犯戒范围,那么就像刚倒下那一刹那一样,也是无犯。“就在那里躺着,不起来”——这句话显示,即使进入了犯戒范围也不起身作为,因此说“他犯戒”。巴利
Niddāvasena nipajjatīti vohāravasena vuttaṃ, pādānaṃ pana bhūmito amocitattā ayaṃ nipanno nāma na hoti, teneva anāpatti vuttā. Apassāya supantassāti kaṭiṭṭhito uddhaṃ piṭṭhikaṇṭake appamattakampi padesaṃ bhūmiṃ aphusāpetvā thambhādiṃ apassāya supantassa. Kaṭiṭṭhiṃ pana bhūmiṃ phusāpentassa sayanaṃ nāma hoti. Piṭṭhipasāraṇalakkhaṇā hi seyyā. Dīghavandanādīsupi tiriyaṃ piṭṭhikaṇṭakānaṃ pasāritattā nipajjanamevāti āpatti pariharitabbāva ‘‘vandāmīti pādamūle nipajjī’’tiādīsu nipajjanasseva vuttattā. Tassāpi anāpatti patanakkhaṇe avisayattā, visaye jāte sahasā vuṭṭhitattā ca. Yassa pana visaññitāya pacchāpi avisayo, etassa anāpattiyeva patitakkhaṇe viya. Tattheva sayati na vuṭṭhātīti iminā visayepi akaraṇaṃ dasseti, teneva ‘‘tassa āpattī’’ti vuttaṃ.
“以一侧弯曲”是指:双脚没有离开地面,只是把身体弯向一侧躺着。不过,这是玛哈巴杜玛长老在《大注释》中说的,两者相关联,因此表明“这是《大注释》里记载的玛哈巴杜玛长老的主张”。其中,因为即使对睡着的人来说也不构成犯境,所以玛哈巴杜玛长老说“由于不构成犯境,所以看不到有罪”。但诸位老师认为,睡着的人并没有失去知觉,所以仍构成犯境,因此不说无罪。如果已经失去知觉,那就确实无罪。“两个人”等话也是《大注释》里的原文,因为后面才说到,所以作为依据。这里,通过“被夜叉附身”这一说法,也已经把失去知觉的人包含在内了。不过,以一侧弯曲躺着的人,因为不算真正躺下,所以应当理解为确实免于犯罪。巴利
Ekabhaṅgenāti ubho pāde bhūmito amocetvāva ekapassena sarīraṃ bhañjitvā nipanno. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana mahāpadumattherena vuttanti sambandho, tena ‘‘mahāaṭṭhakathāya likhitamahāpadumattheravādo aya’’nti dasseti. Tattha supantassāpi avisayattamatthīti mahāpadumattherena ‘‘avisayattā pana āpatti na dissatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ācariyā pana supantassa visaññattābhāvena visayattā anāpattiṃ na kathayanti. Visaññatte sati anāpattiyeva. Dve pana janātiādipi mahāaṭṭhakathāyameva vacanaṃ, tadeva pacchā vuttattā pamāṇaṃ. Yakkhagahitaggahaṇeneva cettha visaññībhūtopi saṅgahito. Ekabhaṅgena nipanno pana anipannattā āpattito muccatiyevāti gahetabbaṃ.
78 在虚空中没有足迹。“足迹”指脚印,所以说“虚空中的足迹”。“此为最上”意思是这就是最高的。“即是”指的是这个。剩下的内容都很清楚。巴利
78.Apadeti ākāse. Padanti padavaḷañjaṃ, tenāha ‘‘ākāse pada’’nti. Etadagganti eso aggo. Yadidanti yo ayaṃ. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
1 2 3 4